Daria Fan Fics

Dark

Rating: PG-13 for adult themes

Summary: WWE and Charmed crossover

Disclaimer- I disclaimer everyone, I don’t own the WWE characters, I don’t own the charmed characters, the DOD are themselves.

Dedicated to WWE, Charmed and the following people:
Sunny
Jaden
Russel (Bronwyn)
Melody (Mama)
Angela (Chiquitita)
Bridget (Biker Babe)
Jennifer
Kaleigh (Carrots)
the late Starra Noelle
Sandy
KC
Scorpina
Loretta
Sara-Jayne
Ondrea (Cookie)
Janna (confuzion)
Chantal (Lacy)
Tammy
El
Ronnie
Shelly
Rosie
Pilar (Bitch)
Cindy
Anastacia
Sherry (Death Maiden)
Ashli (Slutty bitch)
Robin (the thinker)
Diane (traitor)
Liza
Zoe, Olive, Angel
Teresa (Black Widow)
Kim, Sharon, Heather
Gran, Delanie
Lovie and Eva
ShadeyLady
Heather
JJ
Lise
Bonnie, Mandy, Trina

Chapter 1
Beer Guzzling Wiccan Hunt

Christian one of the slaves was walking along the river edge looking down, he just survived a beating from the head of the Power, an elite group of people in power, that ran the slaves, and Christian was a slave. He left the river and hit the main road just off the woods somewhere. He walked down the lonely road in the dark, wishing death would come.

It almost did. Steve Austin was driving his truck and singing off key.
“And the road is my bride....” He didn’t see Christian at first, he swerved so he wouldn’t run him over. Then he got out of the truck. “Are you fuckin’ crazy?” He asked Christian. Christian looked up, then around then straight at Austin.
“What?” He looked down to the ground again he was ashamed.
“Look at me boy.” Christian looked at Steve Austin. Christian looked at Austin.
“Yes sir?” Austin saw the bruises on his face.
“Turn around.” Christian did as requested and Austin looked at his back after he lifted his tattered shirt. He saw whip marks.
“Where did this come from?”
“I can’t say.”
“You better say.” Austin seethed.
“Vince, Vince McMahon.”
“Come on.”
“Where?”
“Truck.”
“Where are you taking me?”
“To get fixed.”
“You’re going to have my manhood cut off?”
“No.”
“I can’t go with you.”
“Why not?”
“You’re a wiccan and Vince would kill me.”
“Screw the bastard.” Austin brought Christian to the passenger side then got in the drivers side. He turned on the radio and started to sing badly again.
“And the road is my bride.” Christian looked at him. “Not one word.” Said Austin as he drove Christian to the punisher house.

TBC?

Chapter 2
Wiccan

Meanwhile in an area not that far away Piper and Prue Halliwell that lived in an area called Halliwell Haven. They were trying to do deal with their recently late grandmother’s death, Penny Halliwell.
“I can’t do this.” Said Piper.
“Yes you can, don’t worry about it we need to be strong for Gran.” Said Prue.
“What about Phoebe?” Asked Piper.
“We own this house now and I don’t want her anywhere here.” A storm started.
“It’s kinda too late for that Prue.” Said Piper.
“What do you mean?” The doorbell rang it and Piper went to answer it. They’re stood their younger sister Phoebe.
“It’s raining cats and dogs out there.” Said Phoebe.
“This is not happening get the hell out of here.” Said Prue.
“Prue you can’t be mad at me forever.” Said Phoebe.
“Are you kidding, you got wasted, stole my boyfriend not to mention that you weren’t there when grams died.” Said Prue.
“And I feel sorry for that but I’m here now.”
“She’s here now.” Said Piper.
“Fine just stay out of my way.” Said Piper.

In the night Phoebe woke up, the storm had stopped and she made her way to the attic. Piper followed by Prue heard noises and made their way up to the attic.
“What are you doing?” Asked Piper.
“We have no valuables up here for you to pawn.” Said Prue.
“This book is calling me.” Said Phoebe. The other two women looked at the front of the book.
“A book of shadows?” Asked Prue.
“It’s wiccan.” Said Phoebe. The windows opened and slammed shut by themselves.
“I’m going to bed.” Said a scared Piper. A ghost showed up.
“Grams?” Asked Phoebe.
“It’s about time you are home.” Said Grams.
“What do you mean?” Asked Piper. Grams explained they were now the charmed ones and it was their destiny to rid the world of evil. It was a lot to take in.
“One more thing.” Said Grams.
“What?” Asked Prue.
“Watch out for the Under......” Grams didn’t have a chance to finish they were whisked off magically somehow.

They arrived and saw a lot of dark people. One of them was wearing a long black robe.
“What the hell do you want?” Asked Prue.
“I’m the Undertaker and now that the charmed ones have come together it’s time for you to go to your destined group.”
“Hell no.” Said Phoebe.
“You have no choice.” Said Undertaker. They tried to go after him but they didn’t know how to use their powers at that point.
“You win.” Said Prue.
“Prue no way.” Said Piper.
“Yeah way on one condition.”
“What is that?” Asked Undertaker.
“We get to stay in our house, it’s the only thing we have left of grans.” Said Prue.
“Deal and in return my brother Kane will teach you about your powers.” Said Undertaker.
“Wait aren’t you all evil?” Asked Piper.
“We are a mix of evil and good I’m evil right now, Kane is good be happy that I had him deal with you.” Said Undertaker.
“Who are you?” Asked Phoebe.
“We are the punishers.” Said Undertaker. And the rest agreed. All of a sudden two men came in.
“Undertaker.”
“Austin what do you want?” Undertaker looked at Christian then at Austin.
“I need your help.” Said Austin. Christian hung his head in shame. The charmed ones looked at both men.
“For a price.” Said the Undertaker.

TBC?

Chapter 3
Pissed off

After Austin made the deal with Undertaker he asked:
“What do you want me to do with him?”
“Christian will stay here for the time being under my protection.”
“What about me?” Asked Austin.
“What about you?”
“You’re not going to do anything to me are ya?”
“No, take the charmed ones back to their house, your job is to guard them until Kane gets there tomorrow.”
“Hey listen bub we don’t need any guards.” Said Prue.
“Shut up you’ll get us into trouble.” Warned Phoebe.
“You shut up.”
“You both shut up! Do as I say Austin and you won’t be harmed this time.” Undertaker rolled his eyes back. Austin took the charmed ones to their home to guard them. The last thing he wanted to do was piss off a punisher especially one like Undertaker.
“What are you going to do with me?” Asked Christian.
“What do you want me to do with you?” Asked Undertaker.
“I don’t want to go to Vince he’ll want to take me.”
“Where do you want to go?”
“Back to my fellow slaves.”
“You can go when you are healed, if I need you again though.” Undertaker warned.
“I’ll do anything you say you saved my life.”
“Bradshaw take Christian to a spare room I’ll tend to his pain after.” Said Undertaker.
“Yes master.” Said Bradshaw. Undertaker was the head of the punishers and as such everyone in the punishers called him master.

Meanwhile Tori a black witch was at Titan Place conversing with Vince McMahon.
“Well?” Asked Vince.
“The Undertaker has him he’s going to heal what you have done.” Said Tori. Vince grabbed her arm.
“Who brought Christian to the Undertaker?” Tori was reluctant to say so Vince held her tight. “Well?”
“I’m sorry mighty one.” Vince, everyone that was afraid of him called him the mighty one. “It was Austin.” Said Tori.
“Come with me witch and you better not screw me around.”
“I will not mighty one.”

Vince brought Tori to the Undertaker.
“Undertaker you made a deal with Austin.”
“I made no deal McMahon if you and your witch had any brains you get out now.”
“Okey dokey.” Said Tori trying to leave but Vince grabbed her arm to stop her.
“I want Austin on a platter.”
“As do I.” Said Undertaker.
“Then we are in agreement, you help me to mess with Austin and in return?”
“Give me your witch right now she has to heal someone you broke.” Said Undertaker.
“I want Christian.”
“McMahon you leave that boy alone he will go back home and if you ever touch him again you will be beat within an inch of your life.” Said Vince. Vince bowed down to the Dark Undertaker and left. Undertaker looked at Tori.
“What are you going to do with me?”
“You will heal Christian then you will be sent back to the coven.” Said Undertaker. Kane came in.
“Brother.” Kane was the only one that didn’t call Undertaker master cause they were brothers.
“What?”
“Whose the girl?”
“Bradshaw take this witch to Christian.”
“Yes master.” Said Bradshaw.
“Witch!” Warned Undertaker.
“Yes?”
“Do your job, don’t mess up and you won’t be harmed.”
“Yes master.” Bradshaw took Tori to Christian so she could heal him.
“She’s hot.” Said Kane.
“Kane if you took off your mask you would scare her.”
“That is your fault brother.”
“I agree what do you want?”
“Her, I want her.”
“How?”
“My love.”
“Then you’ll have her, on one condition.”
“What?”
“You never take off your mask to her.”
“I agree.” Kane left the room.

TBC....

Chapter 4
Charmed and Dangerous

Kane went to Halliwell Haven the next day, early afternoon.
“Are you ready for your training?” He asked.
“We been thinking about that we don’t need your kind of training.” Said Prue. Kane lifted up his arms, looked in Prue’s direction and as they went back down she went flying across the livingroom.
“Prue!” Yelled Phoebe as she and Piper went to help her up.
“Make no mistake I may be good right now but I’m the one in control.”
“You win.” Said Piper. Through Kane they learned some kick ass moves and used to honed their power for the greater good. Phoebe had Prue in an ankle lock. The phone rang and she dropped Prue’s ankle and looked at her watch.
“I’ll get it.” Phoebe went to the kitchen and answered the phone.
“What the hell is going on here?” Asked Prue.
“Beats me.” Said Piper.
“Back to work.” Said Kane. As Prue and Piper worked Phoebe came in.
“I have to go.”
“Oh no you don’t sister.” Said Piper grabbing her arm.
“Oh yeah I do.” Phoebe left and Prue shrugged.
“Aren’t you going to do anything?” Asked Piper to her older sister.
“What for? Phoebe always thinks about herself, she doesn’t care.” Said Prue.
“Aren’t you going to do anything?” Asked Piper to Kane.
“In a bit, get back to work.” Said Kane.
“And just what are you going to do?” Asked Prue.
“I’m a sensor, I’ll find her.” Said Kane. Prue and Piper got back to work.

When Kane was happy with the results and how they were heading he did a sensor check and found Phoebe in a posh hotel room with a man.
“No sex when working witch.”
“How the hell did you find me?” Asked Phoebe.
“You heard me.” Said Kane ignoring the question.
“Hi I’m Victor, Phoebe’s father.”
“Do my sisters know?” Asked Phoebe.
“They don’t know your father?” Asked Kane.
“None of us do, I found him again on the internet.” Said Phoebe.
“Phoebe told me what you are doing and what is her destiny, I don’t agree with it, I don’t like them as witches but I think they should be prepared.” Said Victor.
“Agreed is this going to interfere?” Asked Kane to Phoebe.
“It might Prue hates dad with a passion.”
“Go with me now.” Said Kane transporting them back to the house via magic.

Prue and Piper were drinking lemonade when the three of them entered the diningroom.
“Oh my god dad!” Exclaimed Piper. Prue took one look at their father and kicked him in the gut enough to knock him over.
“Bout time you got that kick right.” Said Kane.
“Prue! That was dad.” Said Phoebe helping her father up.
“It’s ok I gather Prue is pissed.” Said Victor.
“You left us and we needed you.” Said Prue.
“You go with me.” Said Kane to Victor.
“Where?” Asked Victor.
“You are a slave.” Said Kane.
“Dad!” Phoebe tried to intervene.
“That’s all he’s good for.” Said Prue turning her back on her father. Kane took Victor to the slaves magically of course.

After Kane dropped him off at the slaves he went back to the punishers.
“She is yours for the taking brother.” Said Undertaker.
“What?” Asked Kane. Tori came in. She was dressed in a see through black nightie, very short.
“Hello Kane.” Said Tori.
“Who are you?” Asked Kane.
“Your love.” Said Tori taking Kane’s arm.
“Don’t bug me till two days from now brother, I’m going to rock her world.” Said Kane as he and Tori headed towards his room. Undertaker chuckled at Kane. Then he sat and pondered what was his next move with McMahon against Austin.

TBC....

Chapter 5

Shane and Vince talked extensively on how they should screw Austin for bringing Christian to the Undertaker.
“Sable bring this note to the Undertaker.” Said Vince.
“Are you crazy, do you know what kind of person the Undertaker is?” She asked.
“Yeah I know and don’t question me.” Said Vince.
“Do as dad says Sable and you’ll be rewarded.” Said Shane. Vince handed Sable an envelope with the Undertaker’s name on it.

She went to the punishers and rang the bell. Faarooq answered the door.
“What do you want slut?” He asked.
“My business is with the Undertaker.”
“Just a minute.” He went inside and shut the door behind him a minute later he opened it and led her to the Undertaker’s throne. She kneeled in front of him.
“M’ lord.” She stated.
“Get up.” He said. “What do you want?” She got off her knees.
“Mr McMahon brings this note to you.”
“It’s a trick.” Said Undertaker’s right hand man Paul Bearer.
Undertaker motioned for Sable to give him the note and she did then stepped back.
“Tell him I’ll do it.” Sable quickly left.
“What is it you’ll do?” Asked Paul Bearer.
“You’ll see.”
“It’s time for Mideon’s initiation he has proven his worth.” Said Paul Bearer.
“I agree, have him prepared I will do th ceremony in one hour. I first have something to do.” Undertaker doned in robe went to see McMahon at the power side.

“What is my reward big daddy?” Asked Sable to Vince. The bell rang before Vince got to answer. Shane led the Undertaker inside.
“This.” Said Vince. Undertaker went to Sable.
“On your knees wench.” Sable was too scared to do anything so she complied. Undertaker put his large hand on her throat and said some words in latin.
“I think that’s a good scare for her.” Said Vince. Undertaker helped her up. Sable coughed then sputtered.
“What the hell was that for?” Undertaker put his hand on her throat again, didn’t squeeze but kept it there.
“Go to Austin tell him you had a confrontation with the Undertaker.” Said Vince. Sable looked at Vince and sputtered out.
“Will it save my life?”
“Ten fold.” Said Undertaker.
“Ok.” Said Sable. Undertaker let her go and she went to find Austin.

Undertaker then went back to do the ceremony. Mideon was on a table, with a satin red cover on him. Undertaker cut his finger then he cut his own.
“This former person known as a Godwin will be now Mideon, he is one of my Acolytes.” Undertaker finished the ceremony in Latin. The acolytes came in with a young woman.
“Who are you?” Asked the Undertaker.
“Sunny.”
“What do you want?”
“I seek the Charmed ones.”
“Why?”
“I know I’m their sister I can do magic.”
“Tell me more.” Undertaker conversed with Sunny intently and as they talked he developed a new plan.

TBC...

Chapter 6
Another sister?

“You want me to do what?” Asked Sunny.
“I want you to tell the charmed ones that you could be their sister cause you know their magic.”
“What are you going to do?”
“I will tap into that knowledge to get what they know.” Said Undertaker.
“And If I don’t comply?”
“I will tap into your power, it’s not as big as theirs but it will do.”
“I will comply.” Sunny left. Undertaker summoned his brother Kane.
“This better be important, I have Tori chained in my quarters until I’m able to come back.”
“How is she working out brother?” Asked Undertaker.
“She’s sexy.”
“I want you to do something for me?”
“No way brother.”
“No way what?”
“I don’t swing that way.”
“Not that Kane, I want you to spy on Sunny who is visiting the charmed ones. Report back what you see.”
“Ok as you wish.”

“You are a what?” Asked Prue.
“A lost sister.” Said Sunny.
“What do you mean a lost sister?” Asked Piper. What they didn’t know was Kane astral projected to spy on them.
“I mean I can do magic just like you.” Said Sunny.
“Hold on one minute we need to talk about this.” Said Phoebe. The three of them went to the kitchen and Kane astral followed.
“So what do we do?” Asked Piper.
“I suggest we get rid of her sorry ass.” Said Prue.
“Why maybe we can use her to fight the Undertaker and his men.” Said Phoebe.
“We have enough on our plate then to deal with someone that thinks she’s a sister witch.” Said Prue.
“So it’s agreed?” Asked Piper.
“I don’t like it but I’ll agree.” Said Phoebe. They went back into the livingroom.
“We can’t help you.” Said Prue.
“What? What do you mean?” Asked Sunny.
“We have enough to handle dealing with the Undertaker.” Said Piper.
“No wait you need to help me.” Said Sunny.
“No we don’t.” Said Prue. Sunny all of a sudden disappeared.
“Where did she go?” Asked Phoebe.
“I can answer that.” Said a guy shimmering in with blonde hair and a gorgeous smile.
“Who the hell are you?” Asked Prue trying to kick but he orbed out. Then came back in.

“You failed.” Said Undertaker.
“Wait no please.” Said Sunny. Undertaker summoned Bradshaw and Faarooq.
“Bring her to the solitary room.” Said Undertaker.
“As you wish m’lord.” Said the acolytes.

“I’m Leo.” Said the person.
“Well hello Leo.” Said Phoebe.
“No time for that I’m your whitelighter and guardian of all wiccans. I’m also on the good side of the Punishers.”
“O like the Undertaker’s brother Kane.” Noticed Piper.
“Ya and that girl Sunny was supposed to bring your power to the Undertaker.” Said Leo.
“Told you she was bad.” Said Prue.
“She was forced to.” Said Leo.
“I’m so confused.” Said Piper. Leo explained more.

Undertaker had Sunny in the secured chamber. He was taking her knowledge of wiccan to turn her evil and use her for personal gain. Leo and the Charmed ones came in.
“Don’t think so Undertaker.” Said Leo.
“Youuuuuuuuuuuuu.” Seethed Undertaker to the good side of the Punishers. The charmed ones did their magic and Leo took Sunny away. Undertaker knew he lost this one.

At the Halliwell Haven Sunny was grateful.
“Thank you all.” Said Sunny.
“Be careful.” Said Leo.
“After all that I’m ready to give my powers to you.” Said Sunny.
“I have a better idea.” Said Prue. They worked and dormented Sunny’s power so the Undertaker couldn’t get it. She left Titan Realm with a new lease on life. No making deals with bad guys.

TBC...

Chapter 7
Deadly Alliance

Undertaker met with Vince secretly of the outer realms of Titan Village.
“I want you to kidnap Ryan Shamrock.” Said Vince.
“She’s on your side with her brother.”
“That’s exactly why I want you to do it.”
“Anything special?”
“Make it seem like she’s having sex over and over and over.”
“Ok McMahon.” Undertaker hid his current rage against McMahon but was also against Austin so he agreed to do what McMahon wanted for the meantime.

Undertaker made it back to the mansion when Gangrel came up to him.
“I have adopted Edge and Christian.”
“They belong with the slaves, I just had Christian put back.”
“They are perfect as my vampire fledglings.”
“So be it.”
“One more thing.”
“What Gangrel?”
“I want you to marry Luna and myself tonight at midnight.”
“As you wish.” Said Undertaker. Gangrel left to pick up his fledglings. Undertaker sent for his acolytes.
“I want you to do something.”
“What master?” Asked Bradshaw.
“Kidnap Ryan Shamrock and bring her back here.”
“Anything you want done?” Asked Faarooq.
“Do not touch her sexually but make it look like you are, make sure she screams I want it noticeable.”
“As you wish.”

Gangrel meantime told Edge and Christian that he was bringing them back to raise them as vampires.
“No way.” Said Christian.
“Wait this could be interesting.” Said Edge. He convinced Christian to go along with it.

“What are you going to do with me?” Asked Ryan as she was brought to the Undertaker. Undertaker touched her cheek.
“Guess?” He asked.
“Nooooooooooooooooo!” His acolytes took her away.

Gangrel showed up with Edge and Christian.
“I need a blood ceremony.” Said Gangrel.
“After your wedding.” Said Undertaker.
“As you wish m’lord.” Said Gangrel taking the two of them away. Paul Bearer came up to Undertaker.
“It would be beneficial for you to invited the charmed ones tonight.”
“Why do you say that Paul?”
“To show that what happens with Edge and Christian could happen to them if not careful.”
“Good idea, Mideon?”
“Yes master?”
“Collect the charmed ones.”
“They have magic master.”
“You will not be harmed.” Undertaker made a promise that he get Mideon out in time.

Ken Shamrock finally made it to the Undertaker when he found out he kidnapped Ryan.
“Is my sister hurt?”
“She’s enjoying what’s happening to her.”
“Ahhhhhhhhhhhh!”
“Ryan! If you hurt her!”
“You will get her back unharmed.”
“What’s your reason for doing this Undertaker?” The Charmed ones, Leo and Mideon came in magically.
“We demand you let the girl go.” Said Prue.
“As you wish.” Said Undertaker. He told Mideon to tell the Acolytes to let Ryan go.
“Did that go easier then planned?” Asked Phoebe.
“You will be my guests at a wedding tonight.” Said Undertaker.
“Do we have a choice?” Asked Piper.
“No.”
“I’m in charge of them just because I’m a punisher as well doesn’t mean I’ll let you hurt them.” Said Leo.
“I have no intention of hurting them.”
“Then we accept.” Said Prue.
“What?” Asked Piper. The acolytes and Mideon brought in Ryan.
“Ryan I hope you enjoy your stay.” Said Undertaker.
“Why? Why?” Ken grabbed his sister.
“Did they hurt you?”
“No.” He took her away from Vince that very night and never came back himself.

That night was the wedding. Undertaker placed his hand on top of Gangrel’s and Luna’s.
“As a dark couple you have to abide the dark rules and listen to me as your master.”
“Agreed.” They both said together.
“Some wedding.” Said Piper.
“Now the blood ceremony.” Said Undertaker.
“No way you’re taking our blood.” Said Prue about ready to fight.
“I have no intention on it.”
“It’s for us.” Said Christian referring to him and Edge.
“I don’t...ahhhhhh.” Said Piper. All of a sudden she turned into a creature.
“What are you doing to our sister?” Asked Phoebe.
“I’m not doing anything.” Said Undertaker. Leo knew he spoke the truth.
“Piper is a wendigo.” Said Leo.
“A what?” Asked Phoebe.
“A werewolf.” Said Undertaker.

TBC.......

Chapter 8
Howl at the Moon

Piper as the wedigo ran out of there. Phoebe ran after her, Leo and Prue stayed behind to confront the Undertaker.
“Give us back our sister.” Said Prue.
“I told you I didn’t do it.” Said Undertaker.
“He’s right, the only way she could turn into one is because she refuses to face her fear so she turned into something that most people would be afraid of.” Said Leo. Phoebe came back.
“Our sister the werewolf is fast.” Said Phoebe.
“I want to find her!” Yelled Piper as she grabbed Undertaker by the robe.
“You want to know how to get her back?” Asked Undertaker.
“Yeah, I mean no, not from you. Leo take us home.” Said Prue. Leo orbed Phoebe and Prue home.

Once home they were in the attic looking in the book of shadows. Nothing. All of a sudden an entity popped in.
“Gran?” Asked Phoebe.
“Great first our no good alive father now or dead grandmother.” Said Prue.
“Nice to see you to Prue.” Said Penny Halliwell.
“I’m....” Leo didn’t get a chance to finish.
“Yes I know who you are, their whitelighter and I don’t care for much of them.” Said Penny. Leo kept his mouth shut.
“Gran how do we get Piper and how do we change her back?” Asked Phoebe.
“Like the Undertaker said she needs to face her greatest fear.”
“How do we ask her, she’s a bloody werewolf?” Asked Prue. All of a sudden they heard a snarl at the door.
“Piper be nice we’re you’re sisters.” Said Phoebe.
“Look in the book.” Said Grams leaving, she was scared of werewolfs.
“Little help here grams we looked.” Said Prue. The book’s pages moved magically and a spell showed up.
“Greatest fear spell.” Said Leo. Prue and Phoebe did the spell and Piper the werewolf ran out. The trio chased after her.

All the way to the Punishers.
“Why are we back here?” Asked Prue.
“This is where her greatest fear is.” Said Phoebe. They followed her inside. She went into the livingroom where everyone was. As soon as Piper the werewolf saw the Undertaker she cowered back.
“Ok well you’re her greatest fear now what?” Asked Phoebe.
“She needs to tell me why.” Said Undertaker.”
“She’s a werewolf.” Said Prue. That instance Piper turned back into human.
“I feel like I want some raw meat.” Said Piper. Leo put his arm around Piper.
“You need to tell him why you fear him and then conquer it.” Said Leo. Piper went up to the Undertaker, looked at him in the eye and said:
“I do fear you, why I fear you, I’m afraid you’ll hurt my sisters and Leo.” Said Piper.
“Don’t forget gran.” Said Phoebe.
“Gran’s dead.” Said Piper.
“We’ll explain later.” Said Prue. “Well?” She asked the Undertaker. Undertaker put his huge hand under Piper’s chin and raised it up so she was now directly looking at him.
“Fear makes people stronger.”
“Are you afraid?” Asked Piper and Undertaker snickered. Just that minute Vince McMahon came in.
“Undertaker.”
“What?”
“I want you to kidnap Austin’s sweetie Debra.”
“As you wish.” Said Undertaker. Leo took the girls home, glad that the woman he loved wasn’t a werewolf anymore.

TBC....

Chapter 9
Double Duty

Undertaker went to the charmed house magically the next morning. They were eating breakfast in the kitchen. Prue almost choked.
“Do you mind not doing that so early in the morning?” Asked Piper.
“If you choose to live you’ll get lost so I can borrow your house for a while.”
“You kill anyone we kill you.” Warned Prue.
“I’m not that kind of person.” Said Undertaker.
“You just said if you want to live.” Said Phoebe.
“There are other ways like kidnapping you and training you to be an evil punisher.”
“Ok he wins.” Said Piper.
“Keep the door locked, don’t answer the phone got it?” Asked Prue. Undertaker agreed and the girls went on with their day, they were glad to get out of the house.

“Meet Austin where?” Asked Debra.
“He said at Halliwell Haven.” Said Undertaker.
“Where is that sug?” Asked Debra.
“Past the oak tree.” Said Vince.
“Ok then.” Said Sug. Leo popped in.
“Do you mind not doing that?” Asked Vince.
“Need your help.” Said Leo.
“First transport Debra here to Halliwell Haven, don’t worry she’s a good witch like they are.”
“What for?” Asked Leo.
“She has to meet her husband for training with them.”
“Why wasn’t I notified?” Asked Leo.
“It doesn’t involve you.” Said Vince.
“Why does it you?”
“It doesn’t she wants to learn stuff and Austin set it up and gave me this message.”
“Ok then I’ll be back.” Said Leo.

Leo transported Debra there via orbing. Undertaker hid in the kitchen.
“Will you be alright here? The girls should be back soon.”
“Sure thing sug.” Leo got out.

In the kitchen Mideon transported in via spell.
“Master.” Undertaker clunked his head on hanging pots and pans.
“What the hell do you want?”
“To help.”
“Come with me.” Undertaker and Mideon went to the livingroom of Halliwell Haven.
“Undertaker what do you want?” Asked Debra.
“This.” Undertaker grabbed her by the throat. “You scared Debra.” After he and Mideon put some more scares in her Undertaker let her go.
“Why?” She asked.
“Tell Austin he doesn’t turn to our side you’ll be the one to turn.” Undertaker and Mideon transported out of there. Debra sat in the livingroom and cried.

Mideon transported back home and Undertaker went to Vince.
“It is in agreement then?” Asked Leo.
“Grrr.” Said Undertaker. Leo orbed out of there before Vince could give an answer. Undertaker held his head.
“What’s wrong with you?” Asked Vince.
“Nothing.” Said Undertaker still stinging from the pots and pans.
“The mighty lord of darkness is weak.” Undertaker grabbed Vince around the throat. Vince signalled for him to let go.
“We need to talk.” Said Vince. Stephanie, Vince’s daughter came in.
“Daddy, someone has been through my stuff.”
“Yes we do.” Said Undertaker leaving as well. He knew Vince would seek him out.

While Vince talked to Stephanie Undertaker talked to Paul Bearer.
“He thinks he’ll do me in.” Said Undertaker.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Paul Bearer. Leo orbed in.
“What the hell did you do?” Asked Leo.
“Get out of here boy!” Warned Undertaker.
“I get back one of the wiccans Debra was upset and the girls were suddenly afraid including Piper who already conquered her fear.” Said Leo.
“Did she?” Asked Undertaker.
“Did you have something to do with it?” Asked Leo. Undertaker and Paul Bearer looked at eachother trying to figure that one out.

“That was ingenious.” Said Shane to his father.
“Making sure those girls had a fear using black magic was great wasn’t it?” Asked Vince.
“What about Stephanie?” Asked Shane.
“That will be the next step.” Said Vince.
“Are you sure it will work?” Asked Shane.
“You’ll see Shane, you’ll see.” Said Vince.

TBC....

Chapter 10
Fears

Leo tried to help the girls.
“Stay back I want you away from me!” Yelled Piper.
“This isn’t you talking.” Said Leo.
“Yeah it is stay away from me!” Yelled Piper going upstairs.
“Stay away from my sister, I have to stay away from both of them, I can’t lose neither of them.” Said Phoebe. She ran to the kitchen.
“Prue?” Asked Leo.
“You’re dead.”
“I know.” Said Leo.
“I can’t be near you.” She left the house. Leo orbed as well.

Where he turned up is with the wiccans.
“What the hell do you want?” Asked Austin.
“Don’t tell me Undertaker got to you to.” Said Leo.
“Debra has been hiding in our room and won’t let me in. What does Undertaker have to do with this?” Asked Austin.
“I’m not sure but I think he put a spell on the sisters and Debra.” Said Leo.
“I want to kill him!” Yelled Austin.
“I have a better idea.” Said Leo.
“What?”
“First we go to him to see if he was the one that did it.” Said Leo.
“Then I kill him.” Leo took Austin out of there via orb.

“What do you want?” Asked Undertaker.
“Did you use black magic on the sisters and Debra?” Asked Leo.
“No.”
“You went over there you crazy son of a bitch.” Said Austin.
“To scare your woman so you’ll come looking for me.” Said Undertaker.
“If you didn’t do it I suggest you find out what’s going on.” Said Leo. Undertaker began to work his magic.

“You better run outside the realms Lita.” Said Vince.
“Why the hell should I? I’m a black witch.” Said Lita.
“If they find out I hired you, you’ll be out of business.”
“I want Matt Hardy and he’s in the punishers, I’ll get him if I have to make Undertaker suffer.”
“How are you going to do that?” Asked Vince.
“By making sure everyone knows he did it and not you.”
“You pull this off you’ll have Matt Hardy.” Said Vince. Lita cackled evilly.

Undertaker saw who was behind it after he cast the dark spell but with his deal, he couldn’t give it away else it would ruin the plan.
“Well?” Asked Leo.
“I don’t know but I can fix it.” Said Undertaker.
“Fix it you son of a bitch.” Said Austin.

Leo brought Undertaker and Austin to Halliwell Haven where by this time Piper and Prue were eating supper, Leo didn’t know where Phoebe was, but because of her fear she wouldn’t want to go near her sisters. Undertaker placed his hands on Piper’s head and got rid of her fear. Then he did the same to Prue.
“What’s going on honey?” Asked Piper to Leo.
“You’re not afraid of me?” Asked Leo.
“Why would I be afraid?” Asked Piper. Leo explained quickly to the two girls.
“You asshole!” Yelled Prue trying to attack the Undertaker. He held her back.
“We need to find Phoebe.” Said Leo.
“We have no idea where she is.” Said Prue. Leo closed his eyes.
“The attic.” They all went up there. Phoebe was huddled in the corner.
“Stay away from me, I can’t lose my sisters.” Prue and Piper knew they couldn’t get close. Undertaker went over to Phoebe, kneeled and took her fear away. Phoebe slapped him.
“Stay out of my house!”
“What the hell is with these chicks and slapping me?” Asked Undertaker. Austin went to Undertaker.
“Now Debra.” Leo took Austin and Undertaker to Debra then Leo went back to the charmed ones. Debra let Undertaker in but not Austin.
“What do you fear Debra?” Asked Undertaker.
“That Steve will hurt me.” Undertaker was surprised he thought that it would be of him. He took her fear away then went to McMahon.

“You ready?” Asked Vince.
“This better have worked. I can’t keep cleaning up your messes.” Said Undertaker.
“Yeah I know it makes you too civilized.” Said Vince. What was their plan next?

TBC.....

Chapter 11
Darkest Day

X-Pac of the black witches always had a thing for Tori. Kane couldn’t deny whatever she was to him, she was also a black witch. X-Pac had a plan. He came to Kane.
“I want your woman.”
“Get lost runt! You’ll never have her.” Said Kane. X-Pac grabbed one arm and Kane grabbed the other.
“Helpppppppppppp!” Yelled Tori. Undertaker came in.
“What the hell is going on here!” It wasn’t a question that Undertaker stated. Kane and X-Pac quickly let go of Tori’s arms.
“They think they both own me.” Said Tori.
“I do own her and I have a proposition.” Said X-Pac.
“No way.” Said Kane.
“Talk.” Said Undertaker.
“I take Tori for the weekend if I can’t convince her to be mine then Kane can have her.”
“No way.” Said Kane again.
“I’ll allow it.” Said Undertaker. It was agreed X-Pac and Tori left against Tori’s wishes. That night Undertaker left as well. He had some unfinished business.

“Let me go!” Yelled Stephanie McMahon. She was being dragged out of her home by Undertaker, Paul Bearer, Viscera, Mideon, Edge, Christian and Gangrel. Undertaker placed his huge hand by her face.
“Relax child.” Said Undertaker. They took her back to the punishers.

The next night Vince got a message to use a black witch so they can show him what was going on. Vince of course chose Lita.
“What is to happen here is not my fault.” Said Undertaker.
“Good.” Said Vince.
“Good.” Said Shane. The Undertaker was going to marry Stephanie.
“Whose going to save her?” Asked Lita.
“Austin spit in my face and I have a feeling he’ll do it.” Said Vince. Sure enough Austin stopped the wedding. Lita brought Vince to where the black wedding was supposed to be. Undertaker and his men departed. So did Lita. Vince came in. After Stephanie finished hugging Austin she hugged her daddy.

The next night Shane was in the livingroom. Stephanie, Linda and Vince were upstairs.
“Stephanie come down here!” Yelled Shane.

From upstairs:
“I don’t think this is a good idea.” Said Vince.
“Shane wouldn’t let anything happen to me.” Said Stephanie.
“We’ll go together.” Said Vince. The three of them along with Mark Henry, the Rock and Hunter Hearst Helmsley went downstairs.
“I planned Stephanie’s abduction.” Said Shane. He had Undertaker and the men that were there for the abduction come in the front door.
“No!” Yelled Stephanie running to her mother. Undertaker smiled evilly at the two of them.
“What is this a power trip?” Asked Vince.
“Where is your power dad? All you ever think about is Stephanie.” Said Shane. Linda took her daughter away from the house. They went to see Austin. Vince smiled ruthlessly at Shane and the Undertaker.

“They did what?” Asked Austin.
“I guess Vince was pissed that you saved someone he wanted to get rid of.” Said Linda.
“How do you know he’s involved?” Asked Austin.
“I have this feeling it’s a set up.” Said Linda.
“Why would Shane and daddy do this to me?” Asked Stephanie crying into Austin’s shoulders. Austin tapped her back trying to get her away, the one thing he couldn’t handle was a woman crying.

The next day Linda made Austin head of the land. Vince had to do what he wanted. But Vince and the punishers weren’t going to make it easy for Austin.

Meanwhile Tori came back.
“How was your trip?” Asked Undertaker.
“Get away from me!” Yelled Tori. Kane came in.
“What did you do to her?” Asked Kane.
“Every woman screams when they look at me you should know that by now.” Said Undertaker. It was soon found out that Tori was scared of all men. Even Kane, although she let him a little bit close. Kane had to find out what went on with X-Pac.

TBC.....

Chapter 12
Twice the Prue, Twice the fun

Undertaker summoned Gangrel.
“Yes master?” Bowed Gangrel.
“Take your fledglings and go after the charmed ones.”
“Why master?”
“They need the exercise.”

Gangrel took Edge and Christian to the charmed house.
“What did I tell you about coming into my house!” Yelled Prue as she started to use Wiccan against the Brood. Phoebe and Piper ran down the stairs.
“Hey wait for us.” Said Phoebe. Prue took Gangrel, Piper took Edge and Phoebe took Christian. All of a sudden Prue turned into two Prue’s. Everyone stopped fighting. The two Prue’s looked at eachother.
“Congratulations it seems the master gave you a new power.” Said Gangrel bowing to Prue. Leo orbed in and at that time the Undertaker got the Brood out.
“What happened?” Asked Leo.
“Those icky vampires tried to take us out.” Said Phoebe.
“But Prue got a present from the Undertaker.” Said Piper. Leo looked at the two Prue’s.
“I see that.” The two Prue’s became as one.
“How the hell did I do that?” Asked Prue.
“You have a new power.” Said Leo.
“One of the vampires said that she got it from Undertaker.” Said Piper.
“Check the book of shadows I’m going to pay a visit to the Undertaker.” Said Leo.
“Be careful.” Said Piper.
“Don’t worry you won’t lose me.” Leo kissed Piper.

Leo made his way to the Undertaker.
“Why did you give Prue the power to split into two?”
“Wouldn’t she like it?” Asked Undertaker.
“I asked why.” Said Leo.
“I need help.”
“Not in your sick game.” Undertaker grabbed Leo by the throat. “Listen boy unless you want your woman in trouble, it’s forbidden for whitelighters and wiccans to be involved. Very soon I’ll need her you take it or leave it, but remember what will happen if you leave it.”
“I’ll take it.” Spurted out Leo. Undertaker let him go.
“Wise choice.”

Leo made it back to the sisters. They were in the attic.
“Anything?” Asked Leo hoping they could find something.
“Nothing what did you find out?” Asked Piper.
“Ah nothing.” Leo didn’t think they should know anything right at this moment.
“What about this new power?” Asked Prue.
“Apparently you needed it. It seems you been pulled in all directions.” Said Leo. Phoebe and Piper wrapped their arms around their older sister.
“We’re sorry sister.” Said Phoebe.
“It’s alright.” Said Prue. She didn’t know the reason but she thought she would enjoy this new power.

Undertaker and Gangrel spied on them via black magic.
“Why did you give her the power?” Asked Gangrel.
“Vince will screw me in the end. She is my assurance.” Said Undertaker.
“What if she won’t bite?” Asked Gangrel.
“Then her sisters will suffer.” Kane came in and Gangrel left.
“Brother Tori is different since her weekend with X-Pac.”
“How so Kane.”
“She is scared of men and you’ll pay for setting this up.” Kane left and Undertaker shrugged talking to himself.
“What else is new.” Kane knew he would have to fix Tori.

TBC...

Chapter 13
Two Girlfriends

Chyna of the punishers sensing that Kane was in trouble went to him.
“You should give Tori to X-Pac.” Kane wrapped his hand on her throat.
“What do you know?”
“I know I love you and she doesn’t.” She left the mansion to take a walk.

Meanwhile Austin the new man in power was making Vince’s life hell. He poured shit and beer all over inside the mansion. Vince ushered everyone out into he can figure out what to do. He went to Sable.
“Find us a temporary home until this shit gets cleaned up.” Sable started to kiss Vince and he pulled away.
“I thought I was your honey.”
“You are but women are worth shit to me, go find the home.”
“And if I don’t?”
“Then I’ll feed you to the Undertaker. She went to go and find a new temporary home. He got a note to go and meet someone at Stamford Square.

Meanwhile Austin and Linda were celebrating in their own place with Stephanie. Although Stephanie wasn’t really celebrating.
“What should I do with that piece of crap next?” Asked Austin.
“Well I think that we should pull him under the water.” Said Linda. Stephanie walked into the livingroom.
“Hey what’s wrong Steph.”
“I’m angry.” That’s all she said before she went upstairs to her room.

Kane went to see X-Pac, they were snickering in the home of the black witches. Kane soon found out why. X-Pac and Tori were making out.
“Wench!” Yelled Kane.
“Told ya big loser that I would get her.” Said X-Pac.
“Why would I be interested in you? You’re an asshole.” Said Tori.
“Both of you will suffer till the ends of hell.” Said Kane. That was a promise.

Meanwhile Edge and Christian met with Gangrel.
“We are going back to the slaves.” Said Edge.
“I gave you a life.” Said Gangrel.
“You gave us a death.” Said Christian. They walked away back to the slaves.

Undertaker didn’t know who asked to meet him in the square but he soon found out.
“Never expected you.”
“I have a proposition for you Undertaker.” It was the Big Show.
“Go on.”
“Teach me all you know so I can help you.”
“Why?”
“You’ll need someone to stand with you against your brother.”
“You start tonight.” Big Show agreed.

Gangrel went to Matt of the punishers as well.
“Would you like to be a vampire?” Asked Gangrel.
“I been hoping for the day you would ask. Just one thing?”
“What is that?”
“Get my brother Jeff of the black witches he’ll be interested to.”
“You’re have the ceremony tonight.”

Kane got back to the punishers and found Chyna who started to kiss him.
“Pick me please, she’s no good for you.”
“Why do you want me?”
“Because I love you.”
“Don’t I scare you?”
“How can you scare a person that loves you.” Kane and Chyna went back to his room.

That night the Undertaker performed the ceremony for Matt and Jeff and Gangrel took them away to teach them how to be vampires. That’s when the charmed ones came in.
“We have a bone to pick with you Mr. Undertaker.” Said Phoebe. Undertaker looked at them, rolled his eyes and:
“Grrrrrrrr.” They stepped back.
“We want your ass.” Said Prue.
“Be careful Prue.” Said Piper.
“You bore me, begone.” Undertaker used magic to get rid of them. But now where did they end up?

TBC....

Chapter 14
Peace out Man

“He took us to our home, some great and mighty Undertaker.” Said Prue making fun of him.
“Wait when did I put love beads on the livingroom doorway?” Asked a confused Piper.
“Gramma, gramma!” The three sisters hid in the livingroom and watched the hall where they saw Grams! And little Prue.
“There’s my Prue Bear.” Said Grams.
“Prue Bear?” Asked Phoebe laughing.
“Shhhh.” Said Piper.
“Where are we?” Asked Prue.
“Mom I’m home how are the girls.” A woman with long brown hair came in.
“Mom?” Asked Phoebe with tears in her eyes.
“Piper is hiding and Phoebe is napping shhh.” Said Little Prue.
“Prue go find Piper and Play I have to talk to Gran.”
“Ok mommy.” Little Prue left and gran and the girls mother Patty went into the livingroom.
“I think the girls are in danger.” Said Patty.
“What do you mean?” Asked Penny.
“I think the Punishers and the black witches are trying to get them for their own selfish needs.”
“So they can be turned.” Said Penny nodding.
“What are we going to do?” Asked Patty.
“I see only one solution, bind their powers.” Said Patty.
“Last resort I don’t want them to grow up not knowing they are wiccan.” Said Patty. They went upstairs to check the book of Shadows.
“That stupid Undertaker he took us back to the 70's.” Said Prue.
“I want to meet mom.” Said Phoebe.
“You can’t it might change our future.” Said Piper.
“She’s right.” Said Prue.
“I know I heard voices.” Penny and Patty came into the livingroom before the girls had a chance to hide.
“Who the hell are you?” Asked Penny.
“Ah hi Mom, hi gran.” Said Phoebe.
“Oh no this oh no this can’t be.” Said Patty. They all sat down to figure this out.

Leo meanwhile had to deal with the Undertaker.
“Where are the sisters?”
“I sent them away.”
“Where? They aren’t home!” Leo was pissed.
“I don’t know.”
“You better know soon enough Undertaker or....” He didn’t get a chance to finish.
“You threatening me boy?”

Meanwhile back in that 70's episode:
“Are you telling me we didn’t make it?” Asked Gran.
“No you didn’t mom went first I never got to know her.” Said Phoebe.
“Which explains why we didn’t know about our powers until we were adults.” Said Piper.
“If we bind them now and get them out of here before the little ones see them I think we should be safe.” Said Gran.
“Is that the best thing to do?” Asked Patty.
“I agree with Gran, we weren’t ready till recently to find out we had them, we had to go through all the stuff we went through first.” Said Prue.
“Especially Phoebe.” Said Piper.
“Me what did I do?”
“Boyfriend stealing fake blonde bimbo.” Hissed Prue.
“Get over it already.” Said Phoebe.
“Just one question did you come across the Undertaker?” Asked Gran.
“You asked us that in the future to.” Said Piper.
“I died.” Said Gran.
“You did and you came back as a ghost.” Said Phoebe.
“It was fate, it is fate gran and I had to go so you can continue on.” Said Patty.
“How did you get here?” Asked Penny.
“The Undertaker.” Exclaimed the girls.

“Get them back!” Yelled Leo.
“As you wish but you don’t know what could happen.” Warned Undertaker.
“I don’t care, get them back.” Right about then 70's Grans popped in to take care of the Undertaker.
“Undertaker I have a score to settle with you.” Said Penny.
“You remembered?” Asked Undertaker.
“Another time, bring the now girls back before time changes too much.”
“It won’t change I’ll make sure they don’t remember it.”
“If you hurt my girls.”
“Go back now and get them ready.”

Gran made it back.
“We gotta get them ready guess the Undertaker is getting a heart cause he’s sending them back and making sure they won’t remember now.” Said Gran. All of a sudden a magical door popped up.
“Guess that’s how.” Said Piper.
“I’m not leaving.” Said Phoebe.
“What?” Exclaimed all.
“I never got a chance to know mom I want to stay.” Said Phoebe.
“You need to go quickly girls.” Said Penny. Piper and Prue left through the door while Phoebe went upstairs to the attic.

“Where is Phoebe?” Asked Leo at the Punishers.
“She ran to the attic she wanted to stay.” Said Piper.
“Now what?” Asked Prue.

“Phoebe you can’t stay.” Said Patty.
“Mom I don’t know you, I never got to know you.” Said Phoebe.
“I’ll make a deal with you, I’ll come back as a spirit so you can know me.” Said Patty.
“Really?” Asked Phoebe.
“I’ll go tell him.” Said Gran.

“She’s ready.” Said Gran in the future.
“Good get her back!” Demanded Prue to the Undertaker.
“I will, you three are driving me nuts.” Said Undertaker. Gran took Undertaker aside.
“They tell me I didn’t survive.” She said.
“Right.” Said Undertaker.
“Did you kill me?”
“No.”
“Who did?”
“Your worst enemy.” Undertaker sent Gran back and brought Phoebe in. Prue sent Leo with the girls back home. She went to the Undertaker.
“What did you and gran talk about?”
“Nothing.”
“It had to be something.”
“What did I just say?”
“I’m warning you Undertaker if you mess with my sisters you’ll pay.” Prue left the house and Undertaker snickered. Big Show came in.
“When will we tell the realms that we’re working together?” Asked Big Show.
“Soon very soon.” Said Undertaker laughing evilly.

TBC....

Chapter 15
You win some you lose some

Chyna was on the phone secretly.
“Yeah I’m sure he doesn’t know it. Stop bugging me don’t worry. Yeah see you soon.” What she didn’t know was Undertaker was walking past the room, doned in robe on his way to the bathroom. After she hung up he went into the room.
“What are you up to girl?”
“Nothing.” He reached out and grabbed her around the neck.
“You hurt Kane I hurt you I don’t care if you are a punisher.” She got him to let up on the neck thing he loved so much.
“I’m not.” She left the room to go and do what she wanted to do.
“Damn.” He left in a hurry himself. He sped towards the bathroom.
“What’s he doing?” Asked Matt.
“Looks like our master has to go to the potty. Come on fledglings time for your lessons.” Said Gangrel.
“Alright.” Said Jeff Happy.

Meanwhile HHH found Kane.
“I want Chyna.”
“You can’t have her.”
“I have X Pac and Tori in my little group now and I want her.”
“I told you I, you can’t have her.” Said Kane.
“I’ll get her Kane.”
“I lost Tori to X shit I’m not losing Chyna.”
“I’ll fight you for her.” Said HHH.
“So be it.” Said Kane. The fight was set and Kane planned to win.

Undertaker decided to tell the realm that Big Show and he was working together. The newest slave Chris Jericho went to Stamford Square where Undertaker was making the announcement.
“Personification of evil? You mean personification of boredom.” He went on with his let’s poke fun of the Undertaker and Big Show speech. Then Undertaker said:
“Boy I don’t care who you are but if you don’t shut up you’re going with the slaves.”
“Dumbass I am a slave but I won’t stand by and let you conquer us.” Said Jericho.
“You better run boy and I mean like right now. Or else I’ll shave that little piece of peach fuzz of your face.” Jericho touching his chin gingerly decided never to taunt the head of the punishers again. Instead he went in line to get his slave bracelet
so Undertaker could never confuse his persona again.

While Undertaker and Big Show united to get after things or people that irritated them or tried to get after their plan to destroy things Kane had his hands full with HHH. They were fighting in Stamford Square the next night. Chyna came out with a chair. She looked at Kane.
“Let me hit him.” It wasn’t a question.
“Ok.” Said Kane. Kane turned towards HHH and Chyna hit Kane on the head with the chair she then escaped with HHH.
“Ahhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh!” Screamed Kane after he figured out what was going on.

HHH and Chyna went to the power group to have a chat with McMahon.
“We want to join with you.” Said HHH.
“I know.” Said Vince smiling evilly.
“So where is that champagne you promised?” Asked Chyna. McMahon was happy he had a couple of allies now to talk turkey.

Kane went to the Undertaker.
“She screwed me around.”
“I tried to tell you.”
“You weren’t trying to hurt me brother even though we’re on opposites sides?” Asked Kane.
“Blame me for the fire years ago and now this.” Said Undertaker.
“I’m sorry brother, I need time off right now.”
“And you’ll have it.”
“But I need retribution first.”
“I’ll help.”
“How?”
“I set up HHH and Big Show for tomorrow same place.”
“I want to get him and her.”
“You will somewhere in the middle, I told Show to expect it.”
“How long are you going to work with him?”
“Don’t know.”

The next day in Stamford Square Undertaker thought he better give Big Show some exercise. And that was to put him against X-Pac and Road Dogg. Before the fight Pac and Dogg had some words with the Undertaker.
“Just so you know we are joining HHH they’ll be no stopping us now that he joined the power group.” Said Road Dogg.
“You think so?” Asked Undertaker.
“What do you mean by that?” Asked X-Pac. Undertaker just smiled evilly. In the middle of the fight Undertaker stopped it and called Big Show.
“Show!” Big Show went over to the Undertaker.
“What?”
“Do you want to know the power?” He asked.
“Yes.” Undertaker slapped Big Show.
“Then pay attention.” Big Show was beginning to think that Undertaker was full of hot air.

That night the real fight began with Big show and HHH. Chyna was right beside HHH. In the middle Kane came out to go after HHH and Chyna and they ran. Kane chased them all the way to Madison where the slaves dwelled.

The next night in Stamford Square Vince stood by HHH and Chyna to make an announcement with Shane.
“Many of you know that HHH and Chyna has joined the power group. Something you didn’t know. Austin you are screwed!” Stated Vince. The evil side of the punishers came out. Undertaker and company.
“We rule all.” Said Vince.

Austin, Linda and Stephanie watched the coalition at home in the livingroom.
“I think I had too much beer did I just hear Vince state he made a deal with the devil?” Asked Austin.
“I’m afraid so. And what’s worse he over rid me. Undertaker is now in power of the lands.” Said Linda. Austin spit out his beer.
“Oh my god, oh my god, oh my god.” Repeated Stephanie over and over. Linda and Austin looked at her like she was nuts. Maybe she was.

Undertaker and Vince caused Austin nothing but trouble and every time HHH and Chyna had an hand in it Kane would go after those two alone. Undertaker went up to Kane.
“I can’t rule the world if you keep trying to go after HHH and Chyna.”
“I want revenge.”
“Kane get over it you got dumped.” Said Undertaker. They went their separate ways within the household.

It was getting old school Shane went to his father.
“This revenge on Austin is pointless.”
“Are you turning on me Shane?”
“Not yet but keep it up and I will.”
“You interfere in what I’m doing tonight and you’ll regret it maybe not now but someday.” Said Vince.

Vince then went to the Undertaker. What Vince didn’t know was that Undertaker was thinking the same thing as Shane.
“I want you and the punishers to fight Austin tonight alone.”
“When I fight I fight fair, not a hundred against 1.” Said Undertaker a bit exaggerating but some truth in that.
“You’ll do it or our union is over and then they’ll be hell to pay.” Said Vince.
“Fuck you Vince I’m the leader of the land. And yes they’ll be hell to pay.” Undertaker started to walk away.
“Where are you going?” Asked Vince.
“You’re right our partnership is over.” Undertaker brought the Punishers back home and he took time off. HHH and Chyna stayed with the power group.

At Halliwell Haven they got the news what happened.
“Did you see that?” Asked Prue.
“I don’t understand these crazy people.” Said Piper. The doorbell rang. It was Debra.
“I need help.” Said Debra.
“Why?” Asked Leo.
“Jaden a black witch wants me dead.”
“Why?” Asked Phoebe.
“Because apparently I’m supposed to be more like you.” Said Debra.
“I’ll go find out stuff.” Said Leo.
“From who?” Asked Prue.
“The only man that would know, the Undertaker.” Leo orbed out and Phoebe made some tea for Debra as well as for themselves.

TBC....

Chapter 16
Jaden

Leo found the Undertaker.
“Tell me what you know about a black witch named Jaden.” Said Leo.
“Why should I?”
“Because someone you know needs help.” Said Leo.
“Who?”
“Debra.”
“Austin’s woman? Why would I help her. Austin is my enemy.”
“He is your enemy but she has nothing to do with it. You have to have some heart.” Said Leo. Undertaker held up his hand.
“Be gone.” Said Undertaker. Leo orbed back to Halliwell Haven.

“What did you find out?” Asked Piper.
“Nothing much but she’s right she’s supposed to be more like you instead of just a stand by.” Said Leo.
“And I guess this black witch Jaden wants to stop it?” Asked Prue.
“You got it.” Said Leo.
“Then we have to stop her.” Said Phoebe. They all went up to the attic to check the book of shadows.

Vince found someone to get revenge on the Undertaker for him. Her name was Lada Drae. It was another black witch from the neighbouring realm.
“And if your certain I help you then I can have him for myself?” Asked Lada Drae.
“Like I said you put a scare into him and you can have him for yourself.”
“Good I sized him up he has a big enough cock to give me pleasure and he is the big dog of the realms so that’s a plus, it means money and power.” Said Lada Drae.
“Ok then tell me what you see.” Said Vince as he didn’t want to hear what she had to say. She did a spell.
“I see the Undertaker, he’s with a woman with blonde hair.”
“Must be Debra, she probably came to him after she found out she was being stalked by Jaden.’ Said Vince.
“I know what Debra looks like this is not her.” Said Lada Drae.
“What is happening?”
“They’re kissing.” Said Lada Drae in disgust.
“Guess that dampens your plans.” Said Vince.
“No matter he will be mine.” Said Lada Drae. She left Vince to stalk the Undertkaer.

“For the first time in years I feel like a different man.” Said Undertaker.
“It’s probably because you’re dressing in colours now instead of black and funky.” Said the woman.
“I don’t think that’s it Sara. You’re good for me.” They kissed again. Lada Drae showed up and spied behind a bush. They were by a lake.
“This is just gross. No matter I guess I’ll have to get Sara.” Said Lada Drae.

“Ok until we find something concrete we’ll protect you.” Said Phoebe.
“You will?” Asked Debra.
“Guess we don’t have a choice.” Said Prue.
“What’s up with that sis?” Asked Phoebe.
“Nothing just sick of the games that Undertaker plays.” Said Prue.
“This has nothing to do with the Undertaker.” Said Debra.

Lada Drae went to find Jaden.
“I want your help.” Said Lada Drae.
“Why would another black witch want my help?” Asked Jaden.
“Because I need double the power.”
“Why?”
“I want the Undertaker.”
“I have no interest in that.” Said Jaden.
“I have to get rid of his woman.” Said Lada Drae.
“The Undertaker has a woman I’m shocked I always thought he was interested in men.” Said Jaden.
“Fuck you, a big cock like that is not interested in any guy it’s a woman all the way. I want this one called Sara out of the way, dead.” Said Lada Drae.
“Like I said I don’t care about that I want Debra’s powers.” Said Jaden. Jaden left the slut known as Lada Drae.

“Incoming!” Yelled Phoebe. By this time they hid Debra somewhere.
“Where is Debra?” Asked Jaden.
“Somewhere where you can’t find her.” Said Prue. They did their thing but it never effected Jaden. Piper froze the room but Jaden didn’t freeze.
“This is pointless.” Said Piper. Lada Drae came in magically.
“I can help you defeat these witches, go after the one you want if you kill Sara for me.” Said Lada Drae. Jaden stopped going after the charmed ones. She looked at Lada Drae.
“Nuts to this.” Said Jaden as she took Lada Drae out.
“You killed a fellow black witch?” Asked a confused Phoebe.
“She was annoying me.” Said Jaden.
“So now what?” Asked Prue. Jaden put down her hands.
“I have better things to do then to go after Debra. Get Vince he was behind this slut named Lada Drae to kill the Undertaker’s new love.” Said Jaden.
“Which is who?” Asked Piper.
“Sara, someone named Sara.” Jaden left as well.
“Didn’t think the Undertaker was capable of love.” Said Piper. Leo orbed Debra in.
“What did I miss?” He asked. They told him what just went on.

Meanwhile all was not right in lovers haven. At Vince’s HHH was talking to Chyna.
“You bore me Chyna.” Said HHH.
“What?” Asked Chyna.
“I want to find someone else.”
“Who?” Asked Chyna.
“I have someone in mind. I talked to Vince you can leave now.” Said HHH. Chyna ran from the powers crying. She wasn’t going to the Undertaker she decided to stay with the black witches.

HHH went to see Vince.
“You get rid of her?” Asked Vince.
“Yes.” Said HHH.
“Now you can have Stephanie.”
“I like that idea.” Said HHH. But would Stephanie want HHH?

TBC....

Chapter 17
HHH’s new love

While most of the realms had no concept of Undertaker and Sara now being married, Undertaker was still in hiding. Most people thought it was a joke, they decided that Undertaker was too mean to marry.

Meanwhile Stephanie has been dating Test one of the slaves. Vince didn’t like it. Linda came back with Stephanie to the power house but she didn’t care much for what Vince didn’t like since he pulled the scams he did all in the sake of over taking Austin.
“She can’t be involved with a slave.” Said Vince.
“Leave her alone she’s in love, it’s the least you can do since you tried to get the Undertaker to marry her.” Said Linda.
“When are you going to let that go?”
“When you get yours Vince.” Linda walked away. HHH came in.
“I want her away from that slave.” Said Vince.
“You and I have the same want. Don’t worry I have a plan.” Said HHH.
“What?” Asked Vince. They discussed it.

Meanwhile Stephanie and Test were involved heavily. They were in Stamford Square sitting on a bench when HHH came up behind them and instead of hitting Test on the head with a chair, Test bent to give Stephanie a flower at that point and HHH got Stephanie on the head with a chair at that point. HHH ran and Test never did find out who was behind it.

After Stephanie was taken to the hospital and it was diagnosed that Stephanie lost her memory temporary Linda went to her husband.
“Did you hit Stephanie our daughter on the head with a chair?” She asked.
“What? No I wanted to get Test.”
“But you got Stephanie?”
“It wasn’t me.”
“You had a hand in it Vince that’s good enough for me.” Linda walked away again. She went to send a note.

Meanwhile Mideon decided to go around Naked. He ran past Vince as he was looking over papers.
“Who the hell is that?” Asked Vince.
“Naked Mideon.” Said Shane.
“Get that man some clothes.” Naked Mideon didn’t stay naked for long. They finally got some clothes on him.

Gangrel went to Paul Bearer.
“I’m taking Luna and leaving the punishers.”
“Are you sure you want to do that?” Asked Paul.
“Well we need a new life.” Said Luna.
“Edge and Christian are with the slaves.” Said Gangrel.
“Matt had a contract with the punishers so he’s staying, on the side of good this time.” Said Luna.
“Jeff went back to the black witches.” Said Gangrel.
“You can go, I’ll be leaving as well when Undertaker comes back.” Said Paul Bearer.
“Where is he?” Asked Luna.
“Don’t know but he should be back soon.” Said Paul Bearer. Gangrel and Luna left the realms.

Linda found the Undertaker when he replied to her note.
“This must be your new wife.” Smiled Linda.
“This is Sara, what’s up?” Asked Undertaker.
“I need you to come back, Vince has gone insane. He whacked Stephanie on the head, HHH wants her for his own, she wants Test and Vince doesn’t want to leave her alone about that.
“I’ll be back soon don’t worry.” Said Undertaker.
“Would you like some Tea?” Asked Sara. “We we’re just going to have some.”
“The Undertaker have some tea, I never would have thought it. Ah no thank you I have to get back before Vince finds out I’m gone.” Said Linda.
“Don’t let him control you, I controlled women for years and look what happened.” Said Undertaker.
“I think your woman did you some good Undertaker you changed for the better.” Said Linda going back to the powers.

“I think it’s a good idea that we turn bad sug.” Said Debra.
“So do I and I don’t even mind making a deal with Vince as long as I lead the reigns.” Said Austin guzzling some beer.

Stephanie was clueless for the meantime but she knew what she felt in her heart. She went to Test.
“Will you marry me?” She asked.
“Yes.” Said Test.

Undertaker and Sara found out about it.
“Is that the one with no memory?” Asked Sara.
“Yeah I’m glad she found someone. Stephanie, I was wrong to make deals with Vince to be in power, she ended up suffering in the end.”
“But that was the old you. When you go back you can make it up.”
“I know.”

Vince was not happy.
“We need to do something.” Said Vince.
“Don’t worry I have a she on our plan.” Said HHH.
“Who is she?”
“You’ll find out soon enough.” Said HHH.

The next morning at Halliwell Haven Russel Hellfire (a girl) made her way to the charmed ones.
“Ok come to mama.” Said Russel. She shot through the window with a large gun.
“Ahhh!” Screamed the charmed ones running for cover.

TBC.....



Chapter 18
Russel Hellfire on the lose

The girls were ducked behind the couch and Russel Hellfire was shooting like crazy.
“Piper freeze it!” Yelled Prue.
“I’m trying.” The latest bullet came in and Piper froze it.
“What took so long?” Asked Phoebe.
“I don’t work well under pressure.” Said Piper. They hid behind the couch again. They heard Russel Hellfire come in.
“Ok babies where are you?” She asked as she looked around. Prue stood in front off the window.
“Right here bitch!” Yelled Prue. Russel shot another one and Piper froze and reverse it. Right into Russel Hellfire.
“Oh no.” Said Phoebe.
“What did you do?” Asked Prue.
“I killed her?” Asked a worried Piper.
“Guess we better phone Daryl.” Said Prue. Leo Orbed in as well.
“Bout time.” Said Piper.

Meanwhile Undertaker sent for Daryl Morris. He was a good guy punisher.
“What do you want Undertaker?” Asked Daryl. Daryl nodded at Sara and Sara nodded back.
“You need to help the charmed ones.” Said Undertaker.
“What did you do to them?” Asked Daryl.
“I didn’t do anything.” Said Undertaker.
“I’m supposed to believe that? For years you tried to control everybody.”
“That was the old me.”
“So now what?” Asked Daryl.
“McMahon he sent for someone named Hellfire to kill them.”
“Why?”
“To get them out of the way I think.” Said Undertaker.
“Shit I gotta go find them.” Said Daryl leaving the Undertaker’s house.

“I bet Undertaker did it.” Said Prue.
“He hasn’t been heard or seen.” Said Leo.
“I still bet he tried to kill us. He would want us dead.” Said Prue about ready to leave.
“Where are you going?” Asked Phoebe.
“To find the Undertaker.” Prue left.
“Is that a good idea?” Asked Piper.
“No but you know Prue.” Said Phoebe. Daryl came in.
“What happened?”
“We were trying to find you.” Said Piper.
“I”m a cop and a punisher to the bad I don’t believe this.” Said Daryl.
“Forget that someone tried to kill us.” Said Phoebe.
“He was right.” Said Daryl.
“Who?” Asked Piper.
“The Undertaker.” Said Daryl.
“What does the Undertaker have to do with this?” Asked Leo.
“He told me a man named Hellfire was trying to kill you.” Said Daryl.
“Ah-uh no man woman named Hellfire.” Said Phoebe showing Daryl the ID.
“Man we gotta find Prue.” Said Daryl. All of them left via orb.

“You tried to kill us!” Yelled Prue.
“No.” Said Undertaker. Prue tried to throw things at him via her power.
“What’s going on?” Asked Sara ducking beside her husband.
“She’s pissed get upstairs!” Yelled Undertaker.
“I’m staying with you.” Said Sara.
“Prue stop!” Yelled Phoebe as they orbed. Prue stopped.
“He’s going to pay for killing us.” Said Prue.
“That’s it!” Undertaker and Sara Yelled standing up.
“What is?” Asked Piper.
“My new theme you’re gonna pay.” Said Undertaker. The charmed ones shook their heads.
“I’ll kill him for trying to kill us.” Said Prue about ready to do more damage. Sara stood beside her husband.
“It was Vince.” Said Daryl.
“How do you know?” Questioned Prue.
“The Undertaker said so.” Said Daryl.
“He’s right I heard from the elders they said so.” Said Leo.
“Great.” Said Prue.
“Now what?” Asked Phoebe.
“We go and kill him.” Prue was about to leave but Undertaker grabbed her arm.
“I’ll handle Vince.” They agreed that the Undertaker would handle Vince.

Meanwhile HHH was on the phone.
“Everything ready? Good see you soon.”

Vince and Linda were talking.
“Don’t ruin your daughter’s wedding Vince.” Warned Linda.
“Don’t worry Linda if she intends on marrying a slave then I’ll treat her as one.” Said Vince.

Would Vince ruin Stephanie and Test’s wedding?

TBC....

Chapter 19
The Wedding

Test and Stephanie stood in Stamford Square with Linda and Vince by their sides. The realms were watching it on tv that night. Just as Test and Stephanie were going to say their vows HHH comes out.
“Get out of here!” Yelled Stephanie.
“You heard my daughter!” Yelled Vince.
“I think you should look at this.” Said HHH. He showed them a tape of he and Stephanie at a McDonald’s/wedding chapel drive through in the Vega sector of the realms. Then HHH showed the McMahon clan his hand, on it was a ring.
“We are married.”
“Daddy!” Stephanie cried in Vince’s shoulder and Test stood there looking shocked.

Meanwhile Kane decided to be the bad guy for once. Two broken hearts and he didn’t give a damn. He was having coffee when Jericho of the slaves came in behind him and knocked his arm. It caused Kane to spill the coffee on himself. He turned around to see who it was.
“Jericho!” Yelled Kane.
“I’m sorry Kane, I didn’t mean to spill coffee on you.”
“Coffee? You think this is about coffee?” Asked Kane.
“Isn’t it?” Asked Jericho.
“The slaves will be punished!” Jericho got the hell out of dodge.

Jericho had a sinister motive for what he did. The only way any slave can fight against any member of the realms was to “accidentally” cause a fight. He went back to Edge and Christian.
“Ok I caused Kane to get angry now we have no choice but to reciprocate any and all advances.” Said Jericho.
“That’s why now sign that contract over to us Christian and I will be the leaders and the slaves will get back what we lost already.” Said Edge.
“After supper tonight.” Said Jericho.
“Man it’s going to be good to stick it to Undertaker.” Said Christian.
“I thought you liked him since he saved you from McMahon?” Asked Jericho.
“That was then and this is now.” Said Christian.

While the leaders of the slaves were born Edge and Christian Stephanie told Hunter to meet her alone in Stamford Square and he agreed.
“I want this marriage annulled.” Said Stephanie.
“Can’t do that Stephanie I want to head over the power group and this is the only way I can do it.” Said Hunter.
“I don’t care what you want I want, I don’t want to be married to you.”
“Ok I’ll have it annulled if I fight your father in the square if he wins you’re a free woman.”
“Tomorrow night.” She said.
“Ok.” He said.

Chyna sat crying in the Smackdown hotel. Eddie found her. She was drinking heavily.
“You shouldn’t be drinking Chyna Doll.” Said Eddie.
“What do you know?” Asked Chyna as he took away her glass.
“I know that HHH broke your heart and I want to help you put it back together.” Eddie kissed Chyna soon after they got involved even though she was in the power group and he was a black witch.

Another union was being formed with in the groups. Faarooq and Bradshaw were talking.
“You think Undertaker will be back?” Asked Faarooq.
“Damn I don’t know man.” Said Bradshaw.
“I been thinking.” Said Faarooq.
“What?” Asked Bradshaw.
“Ok start our own little side business.” Said Faarooq.
“What do you mean?” Asked Bradshaw.
“I mean a lot of little people are going to need protection.” Said Faarooq.
“We can hire out our services.” Said Bradshaw.
“Exactly brother.” Said Faarooq. They cheered with their beers. And more beer and more beer.

The next night in Stamford Square with the realms watching it on tv Vince defended his daughter’s honour. HHH had him just about beat. He grabbed a chair to hit Vince on the head and finish it when Stephanie came in. She looked at HHH.
“Please don’t. Please don’t hurt my daddy.” HHH gave in and put down the chair. Stephanie picked it up and as HHH looked at the broken Vince it looked like Stephanie was going to hit HHH but instead took out her own father. Stephanie and HHH left then satisfied that they tricked the realms and that they were going to rule all.

Undertaker spit out his JD.
“What the hell was that?” Asked Sara as they saw what just happened.
“Trouble that’s what.” Said Undertaker putting down the glass.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Sara.
“Time to go back.”
“I’m going with you.”
“I know.” They french kissed eachother passionately. He knew he found the perfect woman for him.

Vince was pissed he summoned a cupid to keep the Charmed ones out of his hair. Who then summoned Phoebe’s true love. Cole Turner.
“Where am I?” Asked Cole a black witch.
“According to a cupid you are Phoebe’s true love.” Said Vince. They looked at eachother, Cole trying to figure Vince McMahon out.

TBC....

Chapter 20
True Love

Prue, her current boyfriend, Piper and Leo and Phoebe alone just came out of the movie theater.
“So are we going for coffee?” Asked Leo.
“You bet.” Said Piper kissing her fiancé.
“You guys go on I’m going home.” Said Phoebe.
“Hey what’s up?” Asked Prue.
“Nothing spoils a party faster then a single gal.” Said Phoebe.
“Come on Phoebe you can explain the movie to me.” Said Leo.
“You don’t know love story?” Asked Phoebe.
“Ah no I don’t.” Said Leo.
“I have much to teach you my friend.” Said Phoebe.

They stopped into this coffee shop and got coffee. That’s when the cupid came in looking for help.
“A black witch is after me.” Said the cupid. The sisters tried to help. But it was too late it vanished.
“Where did it go?” Asked Prue.
“Away?” Suggested Phoebe.
“It can’t just go away, it just poofed out of thin air.” Said Piper. They thought they better go back home before anymore trouble was caused. On the way out Phoebe banged into Cole Turner.
“Sorry.” They said to eachother at the same time. Also at the same time they stared at eachother.
“This may seem stupid but you look familiar.” Said Cole.
“Really, not stupid at all, hey you wanna go for coffee?” Asked Phoebe.
“Sure.” Said Cole. They went back into the coffee house.
“Only Phoebe can bang into a guy by accident then go out for coffee with him.” Said Prue.
“Hey let’s go home and let her discover her new thing.” Said Piper.

Tori was talking to Vince.
“Cole and Phoebe made contact.” Said Tori.
“Good now I need to put my next plan into action.” Said Vince.

Chapter 21

Matt met with Lita and his brother of the black witches.
“Ok what do you two want?” Asked Matt.
“We’re tired of being black witches.” Said Lita.
“You have the powers of one you have to be.” Said Matt.
“We may have them brother but we want to do good. And eventually we’ll ask the only man in the lands to bind our power.” Said Jeff.
“Ok then till then we’ll fight the bad guys.” Said Matt.
“Would Undertaker get back so he can bind them?” Asked Lita. The brothers shrugged they weren’t going to worry about that right now.

Trish a slave went through the gates so Big Show could tag her.
“Ok you pass go on slave.” Said Big Show.
“Thanks stud.” Said Trish. She went to meet with Test a fellow slave and Albert of the punishers.
“I want you two to work together.” Said Trish.
“He’s a slave it’s not allowed.” Said Albert.
“We can rule all if we play our cards right.” Said Trish.
“The slaves can finally have good food and mansions and money.” Said Test dreaming.
“Exactly.” Said Trish.
“What’s in it for you?” Asked Albert.
“Well Test needs revenge on Stephanie and I wouldn’t mind getting a piece of her myself that girl gets everything.” Said Trish.
“Where do I come in?” Asked Albert.
“Think about it Albert Trish and I are slaves.” Said Test.
“Yeah it’s forbidden so we need your protection.” Said Trish. They trio agreed to work together for evil.

Shane found Stephanie with HHH at the arena sector of the realms.
“Are you stupid?” Asked Shane.
“Not really brother I want revenge.” Said Stephanie.
“On what?”
“On daddy he tried to have me married to the Undertaker.” Said Stephanie.
“Get over it Stephanie, we all know with you in power that everyone’s in danger.” Said Shane.
“Yeah especially the Undertaker when he gets back.” Said Stephanie.
“Hey Shane when you get back home turn on the tube.” Said HHH.
“Why?” Asked Shane.
“I think you’ll be interested in what we have to say.” Said HHH. Shane started to walk back to his car and HHH called him. “Shane!”
“What?” Asked a disgusted Shane.
“Love ya brother in law.” HHH said joking.

Shane made it home with Linda to watch what HHH and Stephanie had to say.
“We have been working with someone!” Said Stephanie. Everyone watched from their tv’s waiting to see who the someone was. Many thought it would be the Undertaker. It was Vince McMahon.
“I screwed all of you!” Yelled Vince.
“Holy shit.” Said Shane. Linda whacked him on the head with a newspaper
“Don’t swear.” She said.
“Mom do you know what this means?” Asked Shane.
“Yeah I give up.” Said Linda. Shane looked at his mother, she may have given up but he didn’t.

What did Shane have planned? And when would the Undertaker return?

TBC....

Chapter 22

While Shane had to contend with his sister and new brother in law. Vince McMahon wanted to play with the charmed ones. He called a meeting with himself, Kurt Angle of his own group and the newest Black Witch that had a thing for Phoebe, Cole Turner. They met at Titan Hall in the downtown area of the realms. Vince rented a board room.
“What do you want McMahon?” Asked Cole.
“Simple I heard tell you have a thing for that witch Phoebe.”
“That’s my business.” Said Cole.
“I’m the one in power, Undertaker is gone doubt he’ll ever be back, I’m the one that decides if you can be with her.” Cole grabbed his collar.
“Are you threatening me?”
“Just stating a fact.”
“Let me explain.” Said Kurt Angle, taking Cole Turner aside to discuss the plan.

Meanwhile at Halliwell Haven Phoebe was watching an old sappy black and white movie on tv.
“Jennifer Joy will you marry me?” Asked the character Billy.
“Billy oh golly gee!” Said Jennifer Joy. Next thing Phoebe knows is that Billy turned into Kurt Angle.
“Help me!”
“Who the hell are you?” Asked Phoebe jumping back. Piper and Prue came into the livingroom.
“Our sister finally lost it she’s talking to herself.” Said Prue.
“No Billy talked to me but it’s not Billy.” Said Phoebe.
“Help me the Undertaker put me here.” Said Kurt Angle.
“Ok we need to get a spell to get him out.” Said Piper.
“Is that a good idea?” Asked Prue.
“Yes very good idea.” Said Phoebe as she grabbed the remote control and hid it.
“Please hurry.” Said Kurt Angle.
“You’re not Billy.” Said Jennifer Joy after the sisters went up to the attic.

Vince and Cole were talking.
“I helped you but I don’t want Phoebe to be hurt.” Said Cole.
“She won’t be I want Undertaker framed for putting one of my guys in the tv.” Said Vince.
“I thought you said he wasn’t coming back.” Said Cole.
“Well I don’t know for sure.” Said Vince. “Now summon a horror movie person.”
“Alright.” Said Cole.

They got Kurt Angle out of the tv.
“Ok who the hell are you?” Asked Prue.
“Just someone that got lost in the outer realms and Undertaker got a hold of.” Said Kurt Angle.
“If he can do black magic how come he isn’t a black witch?” Asked Piper.
“Because Undertaker is a money hungry son of a bitch.” Said Angle. Next thing they know Bloody Kaleigh came in with a knife.
“I’m going to kill you!” She lunged at Angle and Piper tried to freeze her.
“It’s not working.” Said Piper. Prue split into two and one of her ran up the stairs.
“Hey whoever you are!” Yelled Prue.
“Bloody Kaleigh!” Yelled Phoebe.
“Get your ass over here!” Yelled Prue. Bloody Kaleigh tried to get her with a knife. Prue went upstairs and Bloody Kaleigh followed. Cole got Angle out of there fast.
“What did you do that for? It was getting interesting.” Said Angle.
“Saving your ass.” Said Cole.
“Put him back.” Said Vince. Angle got sent back.

By then the sisters vanquished Bloody Kaleigh.
“Where did you go?” Asked Phoebe.
“I don’t know.” Said Angle. Prue grabbed him by his balls.
“What do you mean you don’t know?”
“Prue let go.” Said Piper and Prue did.
“I told you Undertaker put me there, you need to get him so you can end his stuff once and for all.”
“We need to put you back in tv land.” Said Piper.
“I agree.” Said Prue.
“Long enough for me to make a date with Jennifer Joy she’s kind of cute.” Said Angle. They put him back.

“Billy?”
“Ah no.” Said Angle.
“Who are you?” Asked Jennifer Joy.
“Kurt Angle.” Said Angle.
“Where is Billy?” Kurt Angle disappeared and Billy showed up.
“I’m right here.” Phoebe sat in front of the tv.
“Now back to my regular scheduled program.” Said Phoebe. Prue and Piper rolled their eyes at their sister.

“That was fun.” Said Angle.
“You better watch it else you will have the Undertaker to contend with.” Said Cole. He shimmered out. X-Pac and Road Dogg came in.
“Ok Vince do something about Hunter.” Said X-Pac.
“What?” Asked Vince.
“He thinks he can control us.” Said Road Dogg. Stephanie and HHH came in.
“No I control you. When I said draw me a bath I mean it!” Yelled Stephanie.
“You heard my wife give her a bath.” Said HHH.
“My hands are tied.” Said Vince as Road Dogg and X-Pac looked at him for help. They had no choice but to do it for now. They’ll find a way to get even with HHH and Stephanie once and for all.

TBC....

*Dedicated to my cousin Jennifer Joy Kereluk, a fellow DOD and someone that had the guts to be in this thing. Also to her new baby and her other baby going to be born next year.

*Doing this chapter I realized that Cole Turner’s real name is Julian McMahon get it?

Chapter 23
And the devil came in on a Harley

“Hunter we wanna talk to you.” Said Road Dogg.
“Yeah what about?” Asked HHH.
“You, you gone stupid, you put Stephanie in charge of the lands and teamed up with her daddy and it’s the three of us that are supposed to be in charge.” Said X-Pac meaning himself, Dogg and HHH.
“Deal with it.” HHH walked away.
“Yeah we’ll deal with it alright.” Said Road Dogg.

That night Vince and Stephanie called everyone to the realms so they could have them do stupid things. The Black Witch’s, the good guys in the power group, the punishers and the slaves. Everyone was getting fed up. Most of all X-Pac and Road Dogg. Stephanie was addressing Phoebe this night.
“I hate you.”
“Tough.” Said Phoebe.
“What did you just say?”
“What are you deaf T-O-U-G-H.” Stephanie slapped the beautiful Phoebe. Prue and Piper were going to defend her but Shane and HHH held them back.
“Alright!” Yelled Prue and before Shane and HHH had a chance to let them go. All of a sudden they heard a Harley enter.
“Who the hell is that?” Asked Vince. Shane and HHH let go of Prue and Piper.
“Oh my god it’s the Undertaker!” Said a worried Stephanie. Undertaker entered the Stamford Square and cleaned house. All the groups cheered. The Halliwell’s and Leo decided to orb out of there. Undertaker took out Vince. X-Pac and Road Dogg took this opportunity to walk away from HHH”s power. Stephanie was about to kick Undertaker. Undertaker grabbed her throat. HHH came up behind Undertaker with a sledgehammer. But that didn’t fizz him. He was more powerful. He continued to fight the good fight. Stephanie got the hell out of dodge. After he took out the bad guys in the power group. Undertaker dressed in a long leather jacket, leather pants with deadman inc on it. A blue shirt that was open slightly, a bandana and sun glasses stood in the ring, rolled his eyes back and said:
“Rest in Peace!” Now no bad guy was safe.

After Undertaker cleaned house he went back to Sara. They had their own house but he was still head of the punishers. Only on the side of good.
“Man you did good.” Said Sara.
“I did, didn’t I?”
“See you still can kick ass without looking like death warmed over.” Said Sara. The two love birds kissed.

Vince, HHH and Stephanie was talking to Shane.
“Why did you join us brother?” Asked Stephanie nursing her neck.
“Well I thought I couldn’t win with you and dad in power so I thought I join you.” Said Shane.
“This better not be a trick.” Said Vince.
“It’s not after all we need revenge on the Undertaker.” Said Shane.

Halliwell Haven Prue was upset.
“What’s wrong Prue?” Asked Piper.
“Phoebe could have died.” Said Prue.
“Nah I couldn’t of, I’m safe.” Said Phoebe trying to take care of her sister.
“No I can’t lose another relative.” Said Prue.
“Prue you’re not going to lose me.” Said Phoebe. Prue went upstairs.
“Now what?” Asked Piper.
“I’m going to see someone.” Said Leo.
“Who?” Asked Piper. Leo orbed out of there. The doorbell rang and Phoebe answered it. It was Cole Turner.
“You’re dating a lawyer?” Asked Piper.
“Yeah ah huh.” Said Phoebe.
“You ok I saw what happened?” Asked Cole
“Why weren’t you there?” Asked Piper.
“Had papers to go over for a case tomorrow.” Said Cole.
“Don’t wait up.” Said Phoebe as she and Cole left. Piper waited for her boyfriend Leo to get back.

TBC.....

Chapter 24

Leo wouldn’t be back for a while. He went to the Undertaker’s and Sara’s house. Undertaker offered him a beer but Leo declined. Leo stared at the Undertaker.
“What?” Asked Undertaker.
“Different, years of looking like death and now this.” Said Leo.
“He needed a change.” Said Sara.
“I agree and good to see you’re on the side of good.” Said Leo.
“So what’s up?” Asked Undertaker.
“I need your help.” Said Leo.
“I don’t do that anymore.” Said Undertaker.
“Just once and I’ll do anything back please.” Begged Leo.
“What?” Asked Undertaker.
“Prue she’s scared that Phoebe could have died tonight before you showed up.”
“And?”
“If she’s this scared of one of her sisters dying she won’t be able to do what she is meant to do.”
“So what did you want from me?”
“Can you play death one more time?” Asked Leo. Undertaker looked at Sara.
“I think you should do it.” Said Sara.
“Are you sure?” Asked Undertaker.
“You need to make her less afraid I think it be a good thing.” Said Sara.
“One condition.” Said Undertaker.
“What?” Asked Leo.
“You get them to bind my dark knowledge until I might need it again.”
“Deal.” Said Leo. Slowly Sara and Leo watched as Undertaker transformed into the Dark, his ring on his ring finger, long black robe and black boots underneath. “I’ll orb you there then you take it from there. Show her some stuff about death anything she wants to see, but make her see that it’s natural part of life and that she shouldn’t be afraid of it.” Said Leo. Undertaker nodded and Leo transported him back to Halliwell Haven.

Leo brought Undertaker to the livingroom where Piper was wearing.
“Leo who did you bring home?” Asked a confused Piper. Undertaker folded his hands together.
“Take a look and you tell me.” Said Leo. Piper looked very closely at the Undertaker. Then she jumped back.
“Jeebus you brought us the Undertaker! At least I think it’s him. He didn’t look like that earlier.” Said Piper.
“I’ll explain after, where is Prue?” Asked Leo.
“Sleeping.” Said Piper.
“I’ll find it.” Said Undertaker going upstairs. Leo explained to his confused girlfriend why he brought the Undertaker back into their house for no apparent reason at all.

Undertaker woke up Prue and she looked at him.
“Who are you?” He pulled back his hood and looked at her back.
“Death.” He transported her out of there.

They got to Stamford Square.
“You’re the Undertaker.”
“Correct.”
“You didn’t look like that when you came in on a hog.”
“I know.”
“What do you want?”
“Like I said show you death.” Said Undertaker. For a while Undertaker showed Prue past images of her mother dying, her grandmother dying, her cat dying, her father leaving. He made her less afraid of it. Then they talked for a while.

“I hope it works.” Said Piper after a while.
“It’s got to.” Said Leo. Undertaker and Prue came in magically.
“I’m not afraid anymore.” Said Prue hugging her sister. Phoebe and Cole came through the front door. Undertaker looked at Cole
“So you picked one to be yours?” Asked Undertaker.
“Phoebe.” Said Cole
“Oh my god what is the Undertaker doing here dressed like that?” Asked Phoebe poking the Undertaker’s arm which he ignored.
“I’ll explain tomorrow right now we have to bind his dark powers.” Said Piper.
“Ok then whatever you say.” Said Phoebe. The sisters bound Undertaker’s powers and he went back to his biker self.
“Now home to my wife need anything at all you know where I am.” Said Undertaker as he left through the front door.
“Now mind telling me what’s going on?” Asked Phoebe.
“Yeah let’s go upstairs.” Said Prue. Prue, Phoebe and Piper went upstairs first together and Leo followed them from behind.

When Undertaker got home he found Stevie Richards wearing white joined up with Ivory and whoever else outside his door.
“What the hell do you want?” Asked Undertaker.
“I want you to join us in censoring the land.” Said Stevie.
“I hate you, and all your political shit ya stand for.” Said Undertaker.
“But you’re not evil anymore you can join us cause you’re good.” Said Stevie.
“I may not look like Satan anymore but I’m still down with the devil and I’ll go mediaeval on your ass.” Said Undertaker picking Stevie up by his collar.
“Put me down!” Undertaker threw him to the ground.
“Get lost!” Stevie ran. He cleaned up some rubble that night but he had more to contend with.

TBC...

Chapter 25

X-Pac and Road Dogg went up to HHH.
“We’re leaving.” Said Dogg.
“Why?” Asked HHH.
“Come on Hunter you let a woman grab ya by the balls, HBK is gone and we’re going to.” Said X-Pac.
“Find who needs you all I need is my woman.” Said HHH. X-Pac and Road Dogg left the lands that night.

One of the wiccans another Cole, Michael Cole found the Undertaker.
“What are you going to say now that you’re on the side of good Undertaker?” Asked Michael Cole.
“Cole too much talk around here time to kick ass.”
“Undertaker did you know Paul Bearer is leaving?” Asked Michael Cole.
“Ya don’t say?” Asked Undertaker walking away.

Where he walked to was Paul Bearer.
“You leaving?” He asked.
“Yes it’s time to.”
“You’ll be back?”
“Whose to say?”
“Kane and I want to give you a proper send off don’t leave till tomorrow.”
“Ok.”

Undertaker found Kane.
“Brother.” Said Undertaker.
“What do you want?” Asked Kane.
“I want to say good bye to Paul properly.”
“I don’t care about that I’m evil.” Said Kane.
“You can be evil tomorrow. Tonight we say good bye.”
“Ok.” Agreed a reluctant Kane.

Austin went to HHH and Vince.
“Debra and I are going to join you.” Said Austin.
“After what I did to you and you want to join?” Asked Vince.
“Yeah I’ll sing ya a song and prove it.” Austin began to sing and even though HHH and Vince couldn’t stand the singing they joined up with him.

While Undertaker and Kane were giving Paul Bearer cake and beer and everyone said good bye to him Kurt Angle decided to go after the Undertaker. He was by Sean Bakery in town where Undertaker parked his hog, he decided to pour cement on it. Mideon caught him.
“What are you doing?” Asked Mideon.
“Oh man did I do that?” Asked Angle evilly. He walked away.

After Paul Bearer left Mideon went to Undertaker.
“You’re bike.” Undertaker went to it and Mideon followed him. Hands on hips Undertaker asked:
“What the hell? Who the fuck did this?”
“Kurt Angle.”
“He’s going to pay.” Mideon new that Angle was on Undertaker’s most wanted list.

Meanwhile Vince called for Raven of the black witches.
“What?” Asked Raven.
“You now are a genie I want you to find the charmed ones.”
“And do what?”
“Give them wishes but screw them up.” Said Vince.
“Gotcha.” Said Raven.

Would Undertaker get revenge on Angle? What kind of genie does Raven make?

TBC....

Chapter 26

Phoebe was nosing around the attic and found a funky bottle. She brought it to the diningroom.
“Hey guys look what I found.” Said Phoebe.
“A bottle so?” Asked Prue.
“I never saw it upstairs before.” Said Piper.
“I found it in the attic.” Said Phoebe.
“Bet it’s 200 year old scotch.” Said Prue going back to breakfast.
“Should I open it?” Asked Phoebe.
“Go for it.” Said Piper. Phoebe did and out came Raven the genie.
“Who the hell are you?” Asked Prue looking at Raven dressed up in mc hammer pants, and a gold vest.
“I’m Raven the genie.”
“What do you want?” Asked Prue.
“To give each of you one wish for setting me free.” Said Raven.
“What’s the catch?” Asked Piper beginning to get suspicious like Prue.
“No catch.” Said Raven.
“Alright I want....” Prue covered Phoebe’s mouth with her hand before she got a chance to finish.
“You mess us around genie you’re going back into that bottle and out to sea.” Said Prue.
“We can do it to we are wiccans.” Said Piper.
“I want fame.” Said Phoebe.
“Done.” Said Raven.
“I want a money tree.” Said Prue.
“Done.” Said Raven.
“I want my own chef to cook for me.” Said Piper.
“Done.” Said Raven. Raven then proceeded to watch tv.

Phoebe left the house and saw an accident on her way to her new temp job. A double car pile up. She went to help with her wiccan stuff. After she got the girl out of one car and made sure everybody got out of the second car a whole crowd gathered around and started chanting her name.
“Phoebe, Phoebe, Phoebe.” They chanted.
“How do you know my name?” Asked Phoebe.
“We love you Phoebe!” They yelled.
“You don’t know me!” She yelled.
“Can I have your autograph?” Asked one. Phoebe was astonished at what was going on.
“Ahhhhhhhhhhh!” More and more kept showing up giving her the fame she wanted.

“Wow a money tree.” Said Prue.
“Yup go out and see for yourself.” Said Raven. Prue went outside to get some money.

Meanwhile Piper went to the kitchen and found her chef. But he was cooking naked. She turned around.
“Get some clothes on.”
“I like to cook in the nude.”
“It’s unsanitary.” Said Piper.

Phoebe got to work but found not only the crowd that followed her but people at work giving her fame as well. So much fame her boss said:
“You’re fired!” Phoebe ran out of there crying.

Meanwhile Prue decided something:
“I want more money!” Poof the money tree vanished. “Genie!” She went inside to find the genie Raven.

Leo came into the kitchen and saw a naked man cooking.
“What the heck is this?” Asked Leo.
“I can explain.” Said Piper.
“Don’t bother.” Said Leo orbing out.

Phoebe came home and Prue came inside.
“I got fired!”
“My money tree is gone!” They went to the kitchen and saw the naked cook.
“Well hello.” Said Phoebe cheering up. Piper took them to the livingroom where genie Raven was watching tv.
“Leo saw him.” Said Piper.
“Oh man I got fired.” Said Phoebe.
“All the money went poof.” Said Prue.
“Genie!” They yelled. Raven was going to leave but Piper froze him.
“Ok un freeze him.” Said Prue and Piper did. Prue grabbed him by the genie balls.
“Who sent you?” Asked Phoebe.
“I don’t know.”
“What do you mean you don’t know?” Asked Piper as Prue pressed hard on his balls.
“Ok, ok it was Vince McMahon.”
“Are you a real genie?” Asked Phoebe.
“No.” Said Raven. They turned him back into Raven and Raven left with his balls in tact.
“Serves us well for getting too greedy.” Said Prue.
“Leo!” Yelled Piper. He wouldn’t show up.
“Now what?” Asked Phoebe.
“Undertaker.” They all said together.

They went to Undertaker’s house and saw Angle picking a fight with Undertaker.
“Why the hell should I be scared of a guy that rides a bike?” Asked Angle.
“You better be scared boy.” Said Undertaker picking up Angle.
“Mr. Undertaker.” Said Phoebe meekly.
“What?” Asked Undertaker.
“We need help sir.” Said Prue. Undertaker looked at Prue astonished she didn’t want to kick his ass for once. He dropped Angle.
“Get the hell out of her and tell Stephanie I wish to see her tomorrow.”
“Stephanie?”
“Stephanie.”
“Ok.” Angle left.
“What?” Asked Undertaker. They explained what happened and Undertaker summoned Leo.
“What?” Asked Leo. Undertaker joined Leo’s and Piper’s hands together and said some words.
“What are you doing?” Asked Leo.
“Never mind.” Said Undertaker.
“Honey what are we doing here?” Asked Leo.
“Oh nothing Honey nothing at all.” Said Prue. Leo orbed the girls and himself home. They knew that they owed the Undertaker one.

Chapter 27

Undertaker met with Stephanie who wasn’t alone, in Stamford Square. She had her body guards. After Undertaker took them out single handedly he went over to Stephanie, lifted her chin so she was looking at him.
“Tell Daddy when he gets back into town that I took over my yard.” Undertaker left leaving Stephanie speechless.

Angle and Undertaker kept fighting until Angle said the wrong thing that almost ended his life.
“You’re wife is scuzzy.” Said Angle. Undertaker grabbed Angle.
“What did you say about my wife?”
“Yeah what did you say about me?” She asked.
“Nothing you’re a beautiful woman.” Said Angle meekly. Undertaker began to beat up on Angle. Then he lifted him in the air high.
“Last ride.” Said Undertaker. He threw Angle down on the ground.
“Good name for it.” Said Sara. Angle got out of there he knew not to mess with the Undertaker or his wife again. Kane, Rock and Benoit came up to the Undertaker.
“We have a bone to pick with you Undertaker.” Said Rock.
“We want to be in charge of the lands.” Said Kane.
“We fight for the lead tonight.” Said Benoit.

They fought and in the middle of it Benoit tried to leave. Rock went after him first and hit him one. Then Kane. Then the Undertaker. Benoit was taken out of the running. It was left between Kane, Undertaker and Rock. Rock won it.

Afterwards Rock went to the Undertaker.
“You’re the head of the lands.”
“What you do that for?” Asked Undertaker.
“Thought you needed the exercise you were getting too chubby.” Said Rock.
“Funny.”
“Besides the head of the lands have too much responsibility something I don’t want to deal with.” The two men went their separate ways.

Kane went to the Undertaker.
“I don’t want to be bad anymore.”
“Working together?” Asked Undertaker.
“Yeah.” Said Kane. Sara was glad that these two decided to work together.

TBC...

Chapter 28

Well Undertaker had his hands full with Vince, HHH and Stephanie Cole Turner took this opportunity to send the witches back into time to erase their line.

It was Halloween and they were going to a party. Dressed as witches of course. Piper dressed like Glinda from wizard of oz, Phoebe dressed like Vampira or Elvira whichever way you want to look at it. Prue not a witch.
“What are you doing?” Asked Piper.
“What?” Asked Prue.
“The three of us are dressed up as witches.” Said Piper.
“Only you’re not.” Said Phoebe.
“Cause I don’t want to.” Said Prue.
“But you’re not dressed up as any.” Said Piper.
“I know that.” The doorbell rang. “Who is that?” Asked Prue.
“It could be Cole.” Said Phoebe. It was Daryl.
“Hey glad you going to.” Said Leo.
“Why?” Asked Daryl.
“So I won’t be the only guy.” Said Leo.
“How come you’re not dressed up?” Asked Daryl.
“Not my thing, nice pirate gear though.” Said Leo.
“What do you mean Cole?” Asked Prue.
“I kind of invited him but I guess he’s not here.” Leo heard bells.
“Be right back.” Said Leo going to the kitchen to orb from there.
“What’s going on?” Asked Daryl.
“Ah checking to see if I turned off the stove.” Said Piper.
“May I use the bathroom?’ Asked Daryl.
“Sure upstairs.” Said Prue. While he went upstairs a big hole sucked the girls back through time. Daryl came back the same time as Leo.
“What is that?” Asked Daryl.
“Trouble.” Said Leo about ready to explain to Daryl what was going on as the hole disappeared.

“You sure you took them away?” Asked Vince.
“Yes.” Said Cole Turner.
“Ok go and do what you’re going to do, I need them out of my hair so I can go after the Undertaker.” Said Vince.
“If I do it right they won’t ever be in your hair again, they’ll never exist.” Said Cole.

“Where are we?” Asked Prue.
“Judging from the clothes I say 1600's.” Said Piper.
“Who would do this?” Asked Phoebe.
“I say the Undertaker.” Said Prue.
“I don’t think so he’s good if its anyone it’s Vince.” Said Prue. While they kept an eye out witch hunters found them.
“Witches!” They yelled.
“Run!” Prue yelled back and they did.

Meanwhile in the castle Noelle Warren was going to have a baby. Sandy the bad witch and you guess it Cole Turner dressed in 1600 garb were there.
“You’ll never have my baby.” Said Noelle.
“Oh I think I will dear and I’ll turn it evil.” Said Sandy. Cole took the evil witch aside.
“No you won’t.”
“What do you mean.”
“Noelle and her girl must die.” Said Cole.
“How do you know it’s a girl?” Asked the witch.
“Trust me I’m from the future the Warren line are all girls.” Said Cole.

“Quickly over here.” Said someone to the wiccans. That someone brought them to a hidden coven of wiccans.
“Who are you?” Asked Prue.
“I’m KC a good witch.”
“What do you want?” Asked Piper.
“I summoned you here with that portal.” Piper’s watch talked.
“It’s 6:30.” KC looked at Piper’s watch.
“You must possess great magic to make something that isn’t alive talk.” Said KC.
“No just a good credit card.” Said Piper.
“So why are we here?” Asked Prue.
“To save Noelle Warren.” Said KC.
“Our great great great great great great great aunt or something like that.” Said Phoebe.
“Right and her baby.” Said KC.
“You brought us here why can’t you do it with your magic?” Asked a reluctant Prue.
“Not strong enough I thought you could.” Piper tried to use her power.
“It isn’t happening sister.” Said Piper.
“Well then I have to teach you all the past magic knowledge.” Said KC.

KC did that and they had no idea this kinda stuff that they showed in tv even existed in real life.
“How do we know we can do this?” Asked Prue.
“You’re too cynical go and save Noelle.” Said KC.

The three girls went back to the castle and since nobody was in the room they got her out.

But halfway through the woods they got caught by Sandy’s men.
“Now what?” Asked Sandy as she and Cole hung back.
“They can’t help her.” Said Cole. They watched the witches make a triad to protect their line.
“Oh no.” Said Sandy.

“The baby is coming!” Yelled Noelle.
“We know we know.!” Yelled Prue.
“Ok Piper you deliver.” Said Phoebe.
“Why me?” Asked Piper.
“Cause you’re the compassionate one I’m going to do something I don’t think I can do.” Said Phoebe. She got on her broom and took a witch’s hat and cackled as she floated up to the moon. Cole disappeared and went back into the future before Phoebe caught him. Sandy ran away on her horse and the others followed.

After the baby was delivered they brought Noelle and the baby girl back to the coven.
“Good work.” Said KC.
“Blessed be.” Said Noelle.
“Blessed be.” Said the wiccans. They went back to the future.

“What happened?” Asked Daryl.
“We got to save our line.” Said Phoebe happy.
“What time is it?” Asked Piper.
“Midnight.” Said Leo. “Don’t worry he knows what you are.” Said Leo to the girls.
“And I’m not telling a soul.” Said Daryl. It was too late to go out so they sat and talked the rest of the night.

Debra found Stephanie. Debra showed her, her hand which had a ring.
“When did you get married?” Asked Stephanie.
“Just recently.” Said Debra.
“To Austin?”
“Yeah.”
“Good the four of us and daddy can rid the realms of the Undertaker once and for all.” Said Stephanie as the two women cackled evilly.

*Dedicated to KC from Maxine’s board, Sandy Sullivan a bitch that I went to highschool with, and the late Starra Noelle.

TBC....

Chapter 29
Ultimate Power

Vince was biding his time before he disclosed his master plan to the realms. Meanwhile he was acting like an asshole to everyone even his own men. The rock got pissed at this.
“Hey I don’t want to know what you do in your spare time but for the bulk in your work time you treat people like monkey crap.” Said the Rock.
“As a matter fact in my spare time I’m the genetic jack hammer for Linda.”
“Well I think you’re a little off with this genetic jackhammer shit your wife doesn’t want to have anything to do with you anymore.”
“It’s her loss.” Said Vince. Rock left and Vince sent for the Dudleys in the punisher group.
“Take care of the rock.” Said Vince.
“Anyway you want it done?” Asked Bubba.
“Just do it.” Said Vince.
“When does everyone get to find out your plan?” Asked D Von.
“When I say so and not before.” Said Vince and the Dudleys went to do what they had to do.

Stephanie was dancing in the grand daddy room of the Power house when her blouse fell apart and her bra strap broke. Her nipple ultimately showed. Jericho found his way inside.
“What a slip up.” Said Jericho laughing. Stephanie immediately covered her breasts with her arms.
“How did you get in here slaves are forbidden?” She asked.
“I found my own way putride Princess.”
“Hey.”
“I never thought you had fake boobs guess I was wrong.” Said Jericho.
“Guards!” She yelled.
“Don’t bother I’m leaving.” Jericho escaped out the window.

Stephanie went to Rhyno of the Punishers.
“I want you to get Jericho.”
“Why not ask one of your men?” He asked.
“I can’t tie it back to me.”
“Ok as you wish.” Rhyno handled Jericho and by the next day Stephanie was known as nipple queen.

Meanwhile Eddie was cheating on Chyna and she caught him.
“Eddie!”
“Hey baby.” He said.
“Don’t hey baby me. I’m leaving.” She left and never came back.

“Get lost Albert.” Said Test.
“Hey we’re on the same side.” Said Albert.
“I’m a bad guy now.”
“I know so am I.” Said Albert.

Trish was also a bad girl and Vince continued to be a bad boy. They met in his downtown office.
“I been a bad girl Mr McMahon.”
“Oh I know.” He got his hand ready as she bent over. She shut the door as he proceeded to be the jackhammer with Trish.

Mideon found the Undertaker.
“I’m leaving to.”
“I know.”
“How do you know?” Asked Mideon.
“I may look normal but I’m far from it.” Said Undertaker.
“I keep forgetting.” Mideon packed up that night.

“Christian I think it’s time to go after the Undertaker.” Said Edge.
“I agree.” Said Christian.
“I’ll get Lillian to pass on the message.” Said Edge.

Lillian found Undertaker.
“Be careful.”
“Of what sweetie?” He asked. She blushed at her new nickname.
“Edge and Christian want a piece of you.”
“Can’t let that happen right?”
“No.” He tapped her on the head as he went to look for Edge and Christian.

While Undertaker had his hands full with Edge and Christian Kane was found in the dark by Hurricane and Molly.
“You have a mask, you’re tall and you’re not helping people? What’s up with that?” Asked Hurricane. Kane looked at Molly who nodded.
“I take care of me only.” Said Kane as he laid Hurricane out even though both of them were on the side of good. Molly went up to Kane.
“What did you do that for?” She asked.
“Stay out of my way.” He gave her a warning. She did.

“Want a piece of me deadman?” Asked Edge after Undertaker took out Christian. After he finished with Edge he told them both.
“Go back to the slaves give them a warning to be careful.”
“Of you?” Asked Edge.
“Vince.” Said Undertaker walking away.

Soon very soon the realms would be in turmoil.

TBC....

Chapter 30

Stephanie sent for a new black witch. Her name was Lada Callie.
“I need you to keep the wiccans busy.” Said Stephanie.
“What did you have in mind?” Asked Lada Callie.
“Keep that protector of their’s Leo busy so I can do what I’m going to do.” Suggested Stephanie.
“Any Suggestions?”
“Yeah word is there is another protector like him a new one named Scorpina that takes care of wiccans to.” Said Stephanie.
“So you want her hurt?”
“Just make it look like it. It will keep him busy and the wiccans thinking that the protectors are in danger.”
“But they aren’t?” Asked Lada Callie.
“Right.”
“Does daddy know you’re doing this?”
“Hell no!” Yelled Stephanie.
“For a price.”
“What?”
“I want the Undertaker.”
“For what?”
“For my toy.” Said Lada Callie.
“The second black witch that wants the Undertaker as a sex toy yeesh I don’t think he’s good looking.”
“Are you kidding he has a big cock and I want it.” Said Lada Callie.
“Ah yeah ok now just go do what I say.”
“As you wish.” Said Lada Callie leaving.

So Lada Callie went after Scorpina a wiccan protector. The other protectors got nervous. They sent for a protector meeting and next thing the wiccans new Scorpina and Leo orbed into the Halliwell Livingroom.
“What’s going on?” Asked Piper.
“One might as you guys that when we came in you were fighting.” Said Scorpina.
“Sisterly love.” Said Prue rolling her eyes.
“Who the hell is this jerk?” Asked Phoebe to Leo.
“This is Scorpina she was being attacked by a black witch.” Said Leo.
“Ok so how is that our problem?” Asked Prue.
“It is because the protectors are being threatened this one that came after me Lada Callie is nuts.” Said Scorpina.
“Again how is that our problem?” Asked a cynical Prue.
“Scorpina is going to be your protector right now while I find out what is going on.” Said Leo. He orbed and Piper was pissed.
“Leo!”
“He won’t answer you I’m in charge now.” Said Scorpina.
“Well she is an innocent.” Said Phoebe.
“Ok well the sooner we co-operate the sooner we get Leo back. Phoebe check the book of Shadows and Piper protect her sorry ass.” Said Prue.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Piper.
“Go to the Undertaker.”
“Why him he’s on the side of good now?” Asked Phoebe.
“He might be able to help.” Said Prue. They went to do what they had to do.

Prue got to the Undertaker and explained what was going on and he used his common sense dark ways since they blocked his black magic.
“The witch is after me.” Said Undertaker.
“Why?” Asked Prue.
“She’s under orders from someone to keep you guys busy.”
“Buy attacking the protectors?” Asked Prue.
“Keeping them busy especially yours keeps the witch and whoever ordered her to do so busy.”
“But why you?”
“I have something this person wants.”
“Which is?”
“Me.”

“Look this isn’t helping get Prue and protect my ass.” Said Scorpina.
“We’re doing what we have to do and shut up and listen, the sooner we find out what is going on then the sooner we get Leo back.” Said Piper.
“I found nothing in the book.” Said Phoebe.
“Back to square one.”
“You back to square one Piper.” The two sisters started to argue.
“Quit it!” Yelled Scorpina.
“Stop telling us what to do.” Said Piper.

“You why?” Asked Prue. Undertaker looked down then at Prue.
“Get it?” He asked.
“Not again didn’t you have a nut that wanted you.”
“Yeah before I married Sara and that’s why I need your help.”
“Anything we owe you.” Said Prue.
“Now that you know what’s going on and you find out who is behind it protect me.”
“You’re big you don’t need protection.”
“From these sluts I do.”
“Why do they seem to be black witches?” Asked Prue.
“I don’t know.”
“Come with me.” Said Prue. Undertaker and Prue went back to Halliwell Haven and they explained to Scorpina, Piper and Phoebe what is going on.

“Not again.” Said Phoebe.
“It’s your fault I can’t see Leo right now?” Asked a confused Piper.
“No it’s not he has nothing to do with why these women want him so badly.” Said Prue.
“No offence big dude but you married a kick ass bitch why can’t she take care of it?” Asked Phoebe.
“That’s exactly what he doesn’t want.” Said Scorpina.
“What?” Asked Piper and Phoebe together.
“She’s right. I want to protect my wife from these girls as much as possible.” Said Undertaker.
“With our help you can.” Said Prue.
“Undertaker I found you.” Said Lada Callie coming in using black magic.
“Get upstairs!” Yelled Scorpina. Undertaker ran upstairs.
“Why did you do that for? All I want is to have sex with him and bear his child.” Said Lada Callie.
“You’re one sick chick.” Said Prue starting to fight Lada Callie. Scorpina orbed up to the Undertaker. Lada Callie soon followed. The girls ran up to the attic where they were.
“I knew you would follow me here.” Said Scorpina.
“You’re a thorn in my side.” Said Lada Callie.
“Why do you want him?” Asked Prue.
“Yeah why?” Asked Phoebe.
“He’s nothing to look at, he’s just a dude who rides a hog and has tattoos.” Said Prue.
“And has a big cock. I’m in love with him.” Said Lada Callie.
“No offence chicky but you can’t be in love with someone you don’t even know.” Said Piper.
“Which would explain you and Leo.” Said Scorpina.
“Yeah now you understand?” Asked Piper.
“Completely.” Said Scorpina attacking Lada Callie using protection power. Before Lada Callie disappeared she took out Scorpina. Lada Callie died and while Scorpina laid dying Piper called:
“Leo!” He came in.
“You were supposed to protect her.” Said Leo.
“It backfired.” Said Prue. Leo tried to heel her but shook his head to signal it wasn’t working.
“It’s my time Leo. Just one thing.” Said Scorpina.
“What?” She signalled for the Undertaker and he bent on knee to see what she wanted.
“Don’t let those sluts win Undertaker.”
“I won’t. I’m not interested in them. I have and love my wife.”
“I know that’s why you can’t let them win. If they do it would change you forever and nobody would be safe.” Scorpina died and they all new what she meant. If Undertaker gave into these sluts he would never forgive himself and nobody would be safe from his wrath.

Vince found Stephanie.
“You ordered all that?” Asked Vince.
“How did you know daddy?”
“I got an anonymous call.” Said Vince.
“Oh.” Said Stephanie.
“Don’t do it again.” Said Vince leaving. Leo orbed Undertaker on request to Stephanie.
“You going to be ok?” Asked Leo.
“Yeah.” Said Undertaker. Leo left.
“What do you want Undertaker?” Asked Stephanie bored.
“I didn’t tell them you were behind it, but I’m warning you Princess you do it again and you’ll pay.”
“No you’ll pay Undertaker!” She slapped him. He left to go back home to his wife.

TBC....

Chapter 31

Shane and Stephanie went to find Linda their mother.
“Trish and Daddy are getting it on.” Said Stephanie.
“I’m not interested.” Said Linda.
“I think you are.” Said Shane.
“Why are you telling me this?” Asked Linda.
“So you’ll go insane mom and Shane and I can take over your share of the realms.”
“Leave me alone both of you.”
“You want us to leave you alone?” Asked Shane as he and Stephanie smiled evilly at one another.
“Yeah.” Said Linda. Shane held his mother’s arms while Stephanie slapped her. They left and Linda was stunned.

That night Linda caught Trish and Vince together. Vince institutionalized her that night. Every day Trish would come by and taunt Linda that she and Vince were having sex. Linda didn’t say anything she was like a vegetable.

Meanwhile at Halliwell Haven Leo told the girls what is going on.
“Why is this our problem?” Asked Piper.
“It’s everyone’s Piper, Vince’s wife is the strong one, he institutionalized her cause she got him in bed with someone else.”
“Man think if all the men did that every time they cheated.” Said Phoebe.
“So what do you want us to do cut off his you know what?” Asked Prue.
“No we got to take away what he wants.” Said Leo.
“Ownership of the land.” Said Piper.
“And give it back to the Undertaker.” Said Prue.
“At least temporarily.” Said Leo.
“How?” Asked Phoebe.
“Bringing in an overseer to help Vince make things nice and legal for everyone.” Said Leo.
“Anyone in mind?” Asked Piper.
“Someone named Ric Flair.” Said Leo.
“But how does that get the Undertaker the law of the lands?” Asked Prue.
“Vince won’t like sharing the key is to get Stephanie and Shane to sign their halves to Flair.” Said Leo.
“That’s the hard part.” Said Piper. They thought about the answer.

They soon found one Leo sent Undertaker an anonymous note. Undertaker went to the institute where Linda was being held. Inside one of the patients went up to him.
“I am the lizard queen!” She screeched as the doctors took her away.
“Hey Linda yeah I’m talking to you, your husband likes my breasts.” Said Trish flaunting herself in front of the quiet Linda.
“Trish.” Undertaker growled at her.
“O god Undertaker.” Trish backed away.
“You’re breaking laws as a slave.”
“It was Vince.”
“Doesn’t matter. Now!” Undertaker did figured out who gave him the note. Leo orbed in the APA.
“Yes master- I mean Undertaker?” Asked Bradshaw.
“Take Trish back to the punisher main house. I’ll deal with her later.” Said Undertaker.
“Sure boss.” Said Faarooq. Leo orbed the APA and Trish to the punisher main house. Undertaker went to Linda.
“Here me.” He stated. She blinked. “He will pay for what he has done.” As the Undertaker was leaving another demented girl came up to him.
“Do you spit or swallow?” She asked. Undertaker left.

Undertaker punished Trish and she went back to the slaves as a good girl with the promise she would never diddle Vince again.

Meanwhile Flair went to Vince.
“You know Stephanie and Shane sold me their share of the land.” Said Flair.
“Noooooooooooooo!” Yelled Vince looking at the legal documentation. Shane and Stephanie came up to the two.
“We had to do it daddy.” Said Stephanie.
“Else the Undertaker would go after us like he did with Trish.” Said Shane.
“You sold it to a Guardian? Now I can’t do anything bad.” Said Vince.
“I think that’s the idea.” Said Flair laughing. Vince and Ric Flair were partners.

Halliwell Haven Undertaker was talking to the sisters and Leo.
“Linda is back at home.” Said Undertaker.
“Good now with Flair Vince’s partner he’ll have no choice but to fly right.” Said Leo.
“He might then again he might do more damage.” Said Undertaker.
“How do we beat him?” Asked Piper.
“Good question, don’t know.” Said Undertaker.
“There is no winning. Evil will always win.” Said Prue going upstairs.
“Prue?” Asked Phoebe. Undertaker raised his hand letting Phoebe know to stay there. He then looked at Leo and Piper.
“You plan to get married.” It was a statement.
“How did you know?” Asked Piper.
“I know.” Said Undertaker.
“Yeah but it’s not allowed.” Said Leo.
“It wasn’t allowed for me to get married but I did.” Said Undertaker.
“So what do you suggest?”
“Follow your heart. Where is the girl?” Asked Undertaker looking upstairs.
“At the end of the hall.” Said Phoebe. Undertaker went upstairs to find Prue.

“I’m tired of being the good girl.” Said Prue.
“You sure?” Asked Undertaker.
“Yeah.”
“I’ll see you tomorrow.”
“How?”
“I’ll send for you.” Said Undertaker. He left Halliwell Haven that night and Prue didn’t tell Leo or the sisters they talked and that they would meet up again the next day.

What does Undertaker have in store for Prue?

Chapter 32
Bad girl or bust

Undertaker sent for Prue. He also sent for Terri a white witch.
“Short and sweet I want you to do something for me.” Said Undertaker.
“Sure Taker what’s up?” Asked Terri.
“Put a spell on Prue.”
“Now wait a minute.” Said Prue.
“It won’t be a bad one, it will be one that discovers what you really want.” Said Undertaker.
“Ah ok.” Sara came in.
“We got problems.” She stated.
“In the other room Terri has work to do, call me when you’re done.” Said Undertaker.
“Sure Undertaker.” Said Terri setting to work.

Undertaker and Sara went into the library which was right next door to where Terri and Prue were.
“Vince is causing too much trouble among everyone.”
“What’s up?” Asked Undertaker.
“He kidnapped two slaves Dan and Jenny Gordon.”
“Married?”
“Uncle and daughter.”
“How old is the child?”
“12.”
“I’ll take care of it.” Undertaker did what he had to do.

Meanwhile the spell was done and Prue was sent back home. The rest of the family was preparing for the wedding. That night Prue fell asleep. She didn’t know that Undertaker already talked to Matt Hardy for a favour.
“Was looking for you.” Said Matt in her dream.
“You found me.” Said Prue in her dream. The dream continued.

Undertaker found Dan and Jenny Gordon.
“Vince you ever take a slave without just cause again you’re ass is mine.” Warned Undertaker.
“I had just cause they were staring at me.” Said Vince.
“We were staring at how ugly....” Before Jenny had a chance to finish Dan clamped a hand over his niece’s mouth.
“She’s just kidding.” Undertaker got them out of there.
“He goes after you again let me know.” Said Undertaker.
“Are you our guardian angel?” Asked Jenny. Undertaker squatted so he was looking at Jenny directly.
“In a way yes.” He said tousling her hair.
“Alright!” Jenny skipped ahead.
“Thanks.” Said Dan.
“I’m going to make sure you get home safely where do you live?”
“An area called Halliwell Haven.” Undertaker looked at the man but didn’t say anything.

Prue woke up the day of the wedding.
“I’m so tired.” Said Prue.
“Ok we can’t tell Piper else she’ll cancel the wedding.” Said Phoebe.
“I know.”
“Ok you go and rest and I’ll try to help.”
“Find the Undertaker.”
“Ok.”

Phoebe went to the Undertaker.
“That spell you gave Prue.”
“What?” He asked.
“She’s exhausted.”
“She’s wore out it has nothing to do with the spell.”
“Why is she wore out?”
“You pull her in all directions.”
“Is that what she told you?”
“She didn’t have to Terri read it and I sensed it.”
“So what do we do?”
“Let her escape at night, when her heart figures out what she wants it will happen.”
“Ok.”
“I need to ask you something.”
“Ok.”
“I took two slaves home last night says they live next door to you.”
“Dan and Jenny? They’re slaves?”
“Yes. Who are they?”
“Dan and Piper used to be involved. Dan and Jenny disappeared and Piper found Leo.”
“So neither of them know about the other.”
“Yeah why?”
“Something’s going to happen I can sense it.”
“I’ll keep an eye out.” Phoebe went home.

The wedding was that afternoon and two things happened.
“Ok who invited my dead wife?” Asked Victor.
“Ok Victor don’t be a prude.” Said Patty.
“I’m not.”
“Stop fighting you two it’s Piper’s day.” Said Penny.
“Ok Piper lets go.” Said Phoebe. Victor went upstairs to get his daughter for her wedding day. That’s when shit happened. First Matt Hardy rode in through the sun room doors on a Harley.
“Prue!” Prue astral projected onto the Harley and they left together. The other Prue lay sleeping cause she was exhausted.
“Prue get your astral butt back here!” Yelled Piper. That’s when Dan and Jenny showed up.
“Piper I’m still in love with you.” Said Dan.
“Dan?” Asked Piper. The doorbell rang and it was Daryl.
“Where is Prue?” Asked Daryl.
“Ah she’s busy.” Said Phoebe.
“She’s under arrest.”
“What?” The whole family said.

“I’m glad we decided to make a baby.” Said Sara.
“Me to.” Said Undertaker kissing his wife. They flopped on the bed. Leo and Phoebe orbed in.
“Ah hum.” Said Phoebe.
“This isn’t happening.” Said Sara with a sigh.
“Not now.” Said Undertaker.
“Yes now.” Phoebe and Leo explained what was going on.

“I’m not getting married.” Said Piper at P3 her nightclub.
“Yes you are.” Said Patty.
“Maybe it’s better that they don’t.” Said Victor. Dan came in.
“Piper I love you.”
“Dan you left and I found someone else.” Said Piper.
“So that’s it?”
“Yeah.”
“I wish I didn’t make a deal with Vince.”
“It’s always him.” Said Piper. Dan left to go back to Jenny.
“See all fixed.” Said Patty.
“Will Leo see it?” Asked Piper. They went back to the house.

“Phoebe what’s going on?” Asked Cole.
“Cole Prue is up for murder.” Said Phoebe.
“That’s why you brought the Undertaker home?” Asked Cole.
“He’s going to perform the wedding since Penny can’t stay, you and I are going to find the real killer.” Said Leo. Leo and Cole went to go and do that. Piper, Patty and Victor came home.
“Where is Leo?” Asked Piper.
“Where were you?” Asked Undertaker.
“I want Leo.” Said Piper.
“He and Cole are going to find out what really happened.” Said Phoebe.
“Dan’s pissed.” Said Piper.
“What?” Asked Phoebe.
“He said he made a deal with Vince.”
“I’ll be back.” Said Undertaker leaving the house.

He found Matt and astral Prue by Lake Raw.
“Ok that’s enough Matt she’s going home.” Said Undertaker.
“I saved her.” Said Matt.
“I don’t want to go.” Said Prue. Undertaker touched her cheek.
“Why?”
“Because I’m getting wore out being the big sister.” Said Prue. Undertaker began to fix Prue’s problem.

Vince sent for Dan.
“I can turn you back to a slave.” Said Vince.
“No Undertaker is protecting me.” Said Dan.
“Always the Undertaker.” Hissed Vince.
“This is what you’re going to do. Take this cheque I’m going to give you and get out of town.” Said Flair.
“Don’t take it.” Said Vince.
“Slave life is not good for Jenny I’m taking it.” Said Dan going with it.

Cole and Leo found the killer and got him to confess to the police. Astral Prue went back into her body.
“I’m so sorry.” Said Prue hugging Piper.
“What about the other problem?” Asked Piper to Undertaker. Flair came in.
“All taken care of young lady now we have a wedding to see whooo!” Said Flair. The wedding went on.

Afterwards Undertaker went back to Sara to finish off what he started earlier.
“Now where were we?” She asked.
“Right here.” Said Undertaker passionately kissing his wife.

“Ric Flair is a cancer and I’m going to take him out one way or another.” Said Vince.
“How?” Asked Angle.
“If you can’t beat them join them.” Stated Vince.

What did Vince have in mind?

TBC....

Chapter 33

Stephanie and HHH were talking.
“I think daddy is going to double cross us.” Said Stephanie.
“Well we can’t let that happen.” Said HHH kissing his wife.

Vince went to Shane and Linda.
“Stephanie wants control we need to stop her.” Said Vince.
“Why should we believe you?” Asked Linda.
“Because our daughter is dangerous.” Said Vince.
“Only when she’s with you.” Said Shane.
“Are you blind Shane? She and HHH are not a force to be reckoned with.” Said Vince.
“We’ll have to talk to the Undertaker first.” Said Shane taking his mother out of there.
“Always the Undertaker.” Said Vince to himself.

Shane and Linda talked to Undertaker.
“You’re worried that Vince is lying.” Stated Undertaker.
“Yes.” Said Linda.
“Isn’t there a way to tell if he’s lying?” Asked Sara.
“Not by me anymore.” Said Undertaker.
“Kane.” Suggested Shane.
“Yeah he would work.” Said Sara.
“My brother still travels the darkside. But it’s not the bad darkside if that makes sense.”
“Can you find out?” Asked Linda.
“It would be easier to find out what was in Stephanie’s head, Vince knows how to hide it.” Said Undertaker.
“Vince is going out of town tomorrow during the day for a couple of days, we’ll have Stephanie and HHH over for supper, you can find her then.” Said Linda.
“Ok.” Said Undertaker.
“You might want to bring some men for Hunter.” Suggested Shane.
“I don’t want Stephanie hurt, she may be evil right now but she’s my daughter and your sister Shane.”
“I know, it’s Hunter and Vince making her go this way.” Said Shane.
“Stephanie will not be hurt but Shane’s right if we don’t keep HHH at bay then Kane won’t be able to do what he has to do.”
“What about those charmed ones?” Asked Linda.
“Yeah they can keep HHH occupied.” Said Shane.
“I’ll be in touch.” Said Undertaker nodding.

Undertaker went back to the charmed ones and explained what he needed and what he wanted to do.
“You think she’s evil cause of the man she married?” Asked Piper.
“Yeah and her father. Vince is so corrupted by greed that he’ll step on anyone that is in his way. Even his own family.” Said Undertaker.
“When you go over there, go with your brother alone I’ll orb HHH out of there and we’ll keep him busy.” Said Leo.
“On one condition.” Said Prue.
“What?” Asked Undertaker.
“Don’t hurt Stephanie.” Said Phoebe.
“Like I told her mother she will not be harmed.” Said Undertaker.
“Good.” Said Prue.

The next day Vince went out of town and Linda invited Stephanie and HHH over for dinner.
“Mom are you up to something? Cause if you are then you won’t win.” Said Stephanie.
“Steph Linda just wants to have a family dinner that’s all.” Said HHH. The doorbell rang.
“I’ll get it.” Said Shane getting up to let in Undertaker and Kane.
“Get the hell out of my house!” Yelled Stephanie.
“Your house?” Asked Linda.
“Now!” Yelled Undertaker. Leo orbed in and took HHH out of there. Kane went close to Stephanie.
“No please don’t hurt me.” Said Stephanie meekly.
“Like I told your mother you will not be harmed.” Said Undertaker. He kept her still while Kane did his reading. A short while later he was done.
“Well?” Asked Linda.
“She fears Vince will turn on her.” Said Kane. Undertaker tilted Stephanie’s face to look up at her.
“Warning Princess, I suggest you stay on the side of good it will consume you in the end.” Said Undertaker.
“What do you mean?” Asked Stephanie.
“All the anger and the hate.” Said Undertaker.
“Its you I hate, you and daddy.”
“Then why work with him?” Asked Shane. Undertaker held up his hand.
“Another time Princess and you’ll have to face your anger with me. I’m the one you have to deal with to get rid of that hate.” Said Undertaker.
“Why not now?” Asked Linda.
“She won’t be able to concentrate now, she’s tired, it will happen sooner or later.” Said Undertaker.
“Brother we gotta go.” Said Kane.
“Right.” The brothers of destruction left.

Meanwhile Sara came out of the shower and got into a towel. She heard tap, tap, tap.
“Whose there?” She looked out the window and saw nothing. She went back to getting dressed. Tap, tap, tap. “Anybody?”

Kane went back home and Undertaker went to Halliwell Haven.
“What have you done with Stephanie?” Asked HHH. Undertaker grabbed him by the neck.
“Nothing but if you don’t watch it you’ll pay Hunter.” Said Undertaker taking Hunter to his precious wife Stephanie.

Shane and Linda went to Vince.
“Ok we’ll work with you.” Said Shane.
“What made you change your mind?” Asked Vince.
“Stephanie, seeing her like this is killing me.” Said Linda. Shane and his mother left.

The next night Vince announced the take over.
“What the hell are you doing?” Asked Flair.
“Give me back the lands in full or all the bad guys will make the good guys suffer.” Said Vince.

“We been tricked.” Said Linda.
“Stephanie to in a way.” Said Shane.
“Shane this isn’t time to think about Stephanie with these two in power we’re in trouble.” Said Linda.
“Mom they were always in power.”
“No Flair sold his part of the realms. Vince and Stephanie own all.” Said Linda.

“I keep getting this feeling like I’m being watched.” Said Sara.
“By who?” Asked Undertaker.
“I don’t know.”
“Brother what are we going to do about Vince and Stephanie?” Asked Kane.
“Anything they do we’ll fix.” Said Undertaker.
“Brothers of destruction.” Said Kane.

“What will this mean?” Asked Piper.
“Evil and Good will be at odds.” Said Cole.
“What will this mean to us baby?” Asked Phoebe.
“Nothing, I’m not evil.” Said Cole pretending to play along.
“I know but it might wreck us. This is our destiny.” Said Phoebe.
“Our destiny sucks.” Said Prue going upstairs.

“Ahhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh!” Yelled Sara-Jayne the banshee.
“Stop shrieking, I want you to turn a charmed one into a banshee.” Said Vince.
“Ahhhhhhhhhhh!” Yelled Sara-Jayne leaving.

*Dedicated to my cousin who wanted in this story to Sara-Jayne.

TBC....

Chapter 34
Vince and Cole in cahoots

“What do you planned to do with Phoebe?” Asked Vince to Cole.
“I plan to kill all three sisters so evil could rule the earth.” Vince and Cole laughed evilly. What Vince didn’t know was that Shane was there to see him, he came in through the back and heard Vince and Cole talking in the study. He quickly left.

Shane went to the Undertaker.
“My father is planning the death of the charmed ones.” Said Shane.
“Why tell me, why not tell them?”
“I overheard it, I have no proof, one of them is involved with the man who is going to kill them.”
“Turner?”
“How did you know?”
“I sensed it.” Shane and Undertaker had to come up with a plan to stop it.

Stephanie found Sara-Jayne the banshee.
“You don’t want the charmed ones.”
“Eeekkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk.” Screeched the banshee.
“I know what I’m talking about.” Stephanie fell to her knees and Sara-Jayne the banshee knew Stephanie had pain. She decided to feed on it and Stephanie turned to a banshee. Sara-Jayne turned back to normal.
“Wow I better get out of here.” She stated as she saw Stephanie fly up and leave.

Undertaker had Vince around the neck.
“Admit it.”
“Admit what?” Asked Vince playing stupid.
“Do it now else you’ll be the one dead.” Said Undertaker.
“What he does is his business if he wants the charmed ones dead who am I to stop him?” Asked Vince evilly.
“Who?” Questioned Undertaker.
“Cole, Cole Turner.” Leo brought in the charmed ones.
“It’s true?” Asked Phoebe.
“Tell her.” Said Undertaker letting Vince go.
“It’s true.” Said Vince.
“I knew he was no good.” Said Prue. Phoebe’s heart sank to her feet. All of a sudden their was a rumble and glass breaking. Stephanie the banshee came in.
“Eeeeeeeeeeeeek.” Shrieked Stephanie. She first went to Undertaker and tried to choke him.
“Wait!” Yelled Vince. “Stephanie?” Stephanie stopped and looked at her father. Then Stephanie the banshee sensed pain. She went to Phoebe.
“Eeeeeeeeekkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk.” Squealed Stephanie and as she turned human Phoebe turned into a banshee and left.
“Oh shit.” Said Piper. Prue started beating on Vince.
“It’s your fault our sister is a banshee.” Said Prue. Undertaker stopped her.
“It’s the person she thought she loved.” Said Undertaker.
“He’s right Prue.” Said Leo.
“We gotta go stop her.” Said Piper.
“Thanks.” Said Leo to the Undertaker. He took the girls out of there.
“Why was Stephanie a banshee?” Asked Vince. Stephanie cowered in the corner and Undertaker bent near her.
“Are you ready to heal now?”
“Yes.”
“I will get you at midnight.”
“What are you going to do?” Asked Vince.
“About what?”
“Cole.” Said Vince.
“Deliver him to his destiny.” Said Undertaker then he left.

He went to Halliwell Haven.
“I have an idea.” Said Undertaker.
“Well tell us big guy this book isn’t telling us a thing on banshees.” Said Prue.
“I’ll bring him to her.”
“Is that a smart thing to do?” Asked Piper.
“He’s the cause of her pain.” Said Undertaker.
“What about Stephanie?” Asked Prue.
“I am.” Said Undertaker.

Undertaker found Cole.
“Guess they found me out.” Said Cole.
“Yes.”
“Thanks to you.”
“You planned to kill them and you hurt the person that is in love with you.”
“For what is worth I’m in love with her to.”
“I find that hard to believe.”
“Do you? You were evil then you found the love to change your life.”
“You think you could have changed?”
“Partially I did cause of Phoebe.”
“You’ll have to tell her that.”
“I don’t think so.”
“You have no choice.” Undertaker brought Cole to Phoebe.

“Eeeeeeeeeeeeeeek.” Shrieked Phoebe in the tomb. She tried to kill Cole.
“Phoebe I love you!” Undertaker closed his eyes and silently called for Leo to bring in the girls. Leo did. Then Undertaker motioned for them to be silenced. Phoebe looked at Cole and slowly turned back into herself.
“Stay away from me Cole.”
“I love you.”
“I love you to stay away from me.” Said Phoebe. Leo took all three sisters home.
“Now what?” Asked Cole.
“That will be up to you.” Said Undertaker leaving.

Vince sent for Undertaker.
“I want to lead the good guys to victory. Stephanie and HHH still want to take over and we’re doomed if that happens.” Said Vince.
“Why should I believe you.”
“This paper states it. If I go back on it I will be sentenced to death.” Said Vince. Undertaker looked it over.
“Sign it.” Vince did. “Another time I will deal with Stephanie’s hurt, but whatever she does I plan to undo.”
“I’ll gather the good guys tomorrow night and you can lead us to victory.” Said Vince.
“I’m the only one who can.” Said Undertaker.

Undertaker went back home. He kissed his wife passionately.
“What was that for?”
“I love you.”
“What made you say that?”
“I just didn’t want you to turn into a banshee.” Said Undertaker. Before Sara had a chance to reply they heard: tap, tap, tap.
“I been hearing that all week.” Said Sara.
“Just the wind.” Undertaker and Sara lay on their bed about to show their love for eachother.

TBC.....

Chapter 36
A sister lost a sister found

“Where is Prue?” Asked Piper as she and Phoebe tried to ward off Shax (reality Cole Turner.)
“Where is Leo?” Asked Phoebe.
“I think with Prue.” Said Piper.

Meanwhile Prue was on a bad guy kick across town.
“You got him!” Yelled Leo hugging Prue.
“Of course was there ever any doubt?” Asked Prue.
“Well.” All of a sudden Leo heard:
“Leoooooooooo!”
“Piper and Phoebe need me.”
“Go I’ll be here when you return.”
“Shouldn’t you go with me? They might need the power of three.”
“If they do let me know.” Said Prue much to busy playing big sister good guy at the moment. Leo orbed home.

By the time Leo got to the house Cole as Shax was gone and the girls were injured. He healed them.
“Where is Prue?” Asked Piper.
“Fighting bad guys.” Said Leo. “What happened?”
“Some devil being.” Said Phoebe as Leo helped them up.

That devil being found Prue and killed her and then left. He would show up as Cole to the house very soon.

Some found out. Undertaker sent for Leo.
“You’re missing a sister.” Noted Undertaker.
“Sit down you’re going to need to.” Said Sara. Leo sat down.
“Prue’s hunting bad guys.” Said Leo. Undertaker shook his head.
“An hour ago she was murdered.”
“Murdered?” Asked Leo.
“We got the news.” Said Sara sadly.
“How do I know it’s true?”
“I have someone here that saw what happened.” Said Undertaker.
“Who?” Asked Leo.
“Come upstairs.” Said Sara. Undertaker and Sara brought Leo upstairs and there sat Lillian Garcia a fellow wiccan on the bed. Leo went over to her.
“Did you see it?” Lillian had tears in her eyes.
“Yes, it was too late, I was trying to save an innocent that Stephanie wanted done in and I saw her dying across the street on a building.” Said Lillian. They heard the doorbell rang. Leo, Undertaker and Sara went downstairs to answer it. It was Piper and Phoebe.
“Tell me it’s not true.” Said Piper.
“It is.” Leo had tears in his eyes to.
“No.” Piper ran home.
“Leo, I.” Said Phoebe just stunned.
“I’ll be along in a few minutes.” Said Leo. Phoebe nodded and left.
“Well now what?” Asked Undertaker.
“Let Stephanie know if this is her fault she will pay.” Said Leo.
“I’ll handle Stephanie, you need to help your woman.” Said Undertaker. Leo orbed.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Sara.
“First find out if she is to blame.” Said Undertaker.

“Get out! Get out! Because of you my sister is dead! My big sister!” Yelled Piper.
“Piper please.” Begged Leo.
“Get out!” She hit him and ran upstairs.
“Leo I think maybe you better leave for now.” Said Phoebe. Leo orbed and Phoebe went upstairs to comfort her sister.

In the night Phoebe found Piper in the attic casting I want my sister spells.
“Why isn’t it working?” Asked Piper.
“She’s dead honey.” Said Phoebe putting her arms around her older sister. Piper brushed her off.
“We brought people back before I need her.” Said Piper. Piper wouldn’t let Phoebe near her.

The next day Phoebe went to the Undertaker’s and saw Leo there.
“It isn’t Stephanie.” Said Undertaker.
“How do you know?” Asked Leo.
“Kane did a reading.”
“It wasn’t her.” Said Kane sipping his coffee.
“You having fun?” Asked Sara.
“I’m wearing a mask and that hurts what do you think?” Asked Kane.
“Undertaker.” Said Phoebe coming in.
“How’s Piper?” Asked Leo.
“Not good. She doesn’t want to see either of us Leo, the same reason she said last night for you and for me she’s afraid she’ll lose another sister.”
“Oh no.” Said Sara.
“Undertaker I came to ask a favour.” Said Phoebe.
“Name it.” Undertaker drained his coffee.
“Can you help her? I need my sister back.”
“I’ll try.” Undertaker got up to make some plans on how to do it.

Downtown of the realms at Federation Services Paige Matthews read that Prue died.
“Oh no.” She was about to leave.
“Where are you going?” Asked her boss.
“To a funeral.” Said Paige. She left. She didn’t care if she was fired.

Undertaker came down the stairs dawned in his old Ministry robe. Phoebe and Leo looked surprised.
“Don’t scare my sister.” Begged Phoebe.
“Are you evil?” Asked Leo.
“Yeah are you evil?” Asked Sara.
“No but this is the only way I can do it.” Said Undertaker.
“I’ll take you there.” Said Leo. After Leo and Undertaker orbed out of there Sara and Phoebe heard:
tap, tap, tap.
“Did you hear that?” Asked Sara.
“Yeah what is it?” Asked Phoebe.
“It’s a relief not to think I’m crazy.” Said Sara. They sat on the couch and waited.

*Just like when Prue died they put it in two episodes this one I’ll put it in two chapters to keep you in suspense. Really I have my Pre Op today so I had to keep it short. Part two tomorrow.

TBC....

Chapter 37
A sister lost a sister found part B

Undertaker and Leo found Piper doing a summoning spell.
“No gran I want Prue.”
“You can’t have her.” Said Penny.
“She’s my sister.”
“She’s dead.”
“I don’t want you here I summoned Prue.” Said Piper.
“Penny I think we can help.” Said Leo. Penny looked at the Undertaker dressed in ministry robe.
“God I hope you’re right.” Penny left.
“Leave me alone!” Piper tried to run out of the attic but Undertaker grabbed her around the waist.
“Wait downstairs.” Said Undertaker and Leo orbed out of there.

Tap, tap,tap.
“I’m still hearing it.” Said Sara.
“You see anything out the window?” Asked Phoebe.
“No.” Phoebe looked out the window with Sara.
“I don’t either.” The doorbell rang and both girls jumped. Sara answered the door and found Cole Turner.
“Phoebe?” Asked Cole coming in.
“I lost my sister.” Said Phoebe.
“I know I couldn’t stay away I had to come to you.” Said Cole. Phoebe forgetting the once love of her life hurt her hugged him tight.
“You two confuse me.” Said Sara.

Piper was throwing things at the Undertaker.
“You need to move on else you can’t do what you’re supposed to do.” Said Undertaker.
“My sister is dead moron don’t you get it? There isn’t a power of three.” Piper tried to leave but Undertaker grabbed her again. He asked a black witch to be given his black magic bad and he said a spell.

Gran showed up in the livingroom where Leo was.
“What was that noise?” Asked Gran.
“Undertaker helping Piper.”
“I don’t trust him.”
“I do.”
“He went back to the dark.”
“Not the way he used to be.” Said Leo.
“Dark is evil.”
“Not this time.”

After Undertaker finished with Piper she passed out from exhaustion. He picked her up and left the attic.
“Yo!” Leo and gran went upstairs.
“Oh my god what happened to Piper?” Asked Gran.
“She’s exhausted.” Said Undertaker.
“Put her in here.” Said Leo getting Undertaker to put her in his and Piper’s room. After they shut the door Penny held out her hand.
“Thank you Undertaker.” He shook hers.

Stephanie sent for Angle and Raven.
“Undertaker went back to the dark.” Said Stephanie.
“How do you know?” Asked Raven.
“I heard.”
“I don’t think that it’s allowed.” Said Angle.
“You’re right. Angle we’ll go with our plan. Raven you have the authority as a black witch to arrest the Undertaker.” Said Stephanie.
“I will tonight.”

Leo orbed Undertaker home.
“Piper?” Asked Phoebe.
“She’s fine.” Said Undertaker. Leo looked at Cole.
“What is he doing here?” Asked Leo.
“I love him.” Said Phoebe. Undertaker and Leo looked at eachother shaking their heads. The bell rang and Sara let in Raven and some men.
“Undertaker you are under arrest for using black magic.” Said Raven. Undertaker left quietly with Raven he knew he wasn’t supposed to do it.
“I’ll get him out.” Said Cole.
“How?” Asked Sara.
“Cole is a lawyer.” Said Phoebe. Sara nodded. Leo orbed him, Phoebe and Cole out of there.

The next day was Prue’s funeral. Victor was freed as a slave for that day to attend his daughter’s funeral.
“Cole where have you been the funeral is about ready to start?” Asked Phoebe.
“Sorry getting the Undertaker out of jail was harder then I thought he set the dark laws.”
“Did you get him?” Asked Piper coming downstairs.
“Yes.”
“My hero.” Said Phoebe hugging Cole.
“I can’t go with you.” Said Cole.
“I need you.”
“You have to go for Phoebe.” Said Leo. Cole and Leo began to argue.
“Shut up! They are burying my daughter today.” Said Victor.

They went to the funeral and afterwards Paige who was in the back went up to them.
“I’m sorry for Prue’s death.” She said.
“You look familiar.” Said Phoebe.
“I’m nobody.” Said Paige. Just then bad guys ordered by Stephanie attacked.
“No not at her funeral!” Yelled Piper trying to freeze all the bad guys but they left. Paige orbed the re orbed.
“How did you do that?” Asked Phoebe.
“What the hell is this?” Asked Paige leaving.
“Wait!” Yelled Phoebe but Paige chose not to listen.

Penny went to the Undertaker.
“There is another power of three it’s not dead.” Said Penny.
“What do you mean?” Asked Undertaker dressed as bad ass again.
“Long story short, my daughter fell in love with her protector after Victor was made a slave. She wasn’t allowed, they had a baby and the baby paid a visit to the funeral.”
“Some baby.” Said Undertaker.
“It’s not a baby anymore Undertaker. You need to bring her to her sisters.” Penny gave Undertaker the information. He again used black magic. Which he wasn’t allowed.

Piper brought Phoebe tea.
“Chamomille, it helps.” Said Piper.
“Thanks. I couldn’t fall apart yet until you finished.”
“It worked now you can.” Said Piper. Paige rang the bell and they told her to come in.
“Something told me to come here.” Said Paige.
“Why?” Asked Piper.
“I can answer that.” A ghost showed up.
“Mama?” Asked Phoebe. Patty explained to the three that Paige was another sister.

Stephanie again sent Raven to the Undertaker.
“This is nuts.” Said Sara.
“I know.” Said Undertaker.
“You made the laws Undertaker.” Said Raven.
“Screw them.” Said Undertaker.
“You want me to do anything?” Asked Sara.
“You know what to do.” Said Undertaker. She nodded in the morning she would go to the charmed ones. Meanwhile Undertaker went to Raven.

Paige was willing to do what she can. She found it all interesting.
“Where did you learn how to orb?” Asked Phoebe.
“I don’t know, I always could.” Said Paige.
“Her father is a protector remember.” Said Patty.
“Right.” Said Piper. Gran came in.
“Prue says hello and we have a problem.” Said Penny.
“What?” Asked Patty.
“Undertaker was put in jail for helping us.” Said Penny.
“We’ll get him out tomorrow.” Said Piper.
“Sara will visit you tomorrow about it.” Said Penny.
“Gran did you meet our sister?” Asked Phoebe.
“Paige.” Gran tried to hug Paige. Paige backed away.
“Not yet I’m still getting used to it.” Said Paige.
“Any messages for Prue?” Asked Patty.
“Yeah ask her where my blue blouse is.” Said Piper. Patty and Penny left.
“Ah honey about that blouse.” Said Phoebe.
“Sara’s here!” Yelled Leo from downstairs. They went downstairs to try and help.

Vince went to his daughter.
“Ok I’m evil again you win.”
“I know I would daddy I need you.”
“What about HHH?”
“He turned good.”
“He has to be injured then.” Said Vince.
“I got a way to do it without getting us into trouble.” Said Stephanie.
“How?”
“Turn the Undertaker evil.” Said Stephanie. They laughed evilly.

Would Undertaker turn evil?

TBC......

Chapter 38
Evil is a relative thing

Vince sent for Austin.
“You still want to work with me?” Asked Vince.
“Heard you turned evil again.” Said Austin.
“Well?”
“Good to know you boss.” Said Austin shaking hands with Vince.
“Good I have a plan you need to be part of.” Said Vince.
“Tell me more.” Said Austin. They talked.

Undertaker was at the McMahon house talking to Linda and Shane.
“Vince hasn’t attacked in a while.” Said Shane.
“Yeah I don’t like it.” Said Linda.
“What do you mean?” Asked Undertaker.
“He’s up to something I know he joined back with Stephanie.” Said Linda.
“At least HHH is on the side of good.” Noted Shane.
“I’ll keep an eye out.” Said Undertaker. A knock at the door and Shane answered it. It was the outer realm police.
“Ah Mr Undertaker?” Asked the cop. Undertaker stood up and the cop was quaking in his boots. He didn’t want to tell him what he had to tell him.

Shortly after Undertaker ran out of the house, rode his hog all the way home.

He ran in his house. Sara came downstairs.
“What’s wrong?” She asked.
“Are you ok?”
“Yeah why?”
“Some cop said you got in an accident.”
“No I’m fine.”
“I’m going to fine out what’s going on.”

The next day Undertaker went to Stamford Square and had the local TV station tape what he had to say to the realms.
“Some sorry son of a bitch left a message saying my wife was in a car wreck. I got home and everything is fine.” Said Undertaker. “Whoever it is, will pay.”

Undertaker went home and JR the Wiccan showed up.
“Undertaker this was delivered this afternoon.” Said JR. Undertaker opened the purple and black box and saw a naked picture of Sara getting out of the shower.
“Holy shit.” Said Sara. Undertaker dropped the box and grabbed JR.
“You knew about this!” He stated.
“I didn’t know anything it was delivered to my house.” Said JR.
“You sure?”
“Yeah I’m sure I don’t wish any harm on your wife.” Said JR.

The realms were in chaos. Undertaker was going everywhere questioning everyone. One of the places he hit was Slave Land. Test’s house his shackles were taken off.
“Well if it isn’t the Undertaker coming to visit the poor section of the universe.” Said Test.
“Can it Canuck. I want to know are you taping my wife?”
“I have no interest in your wife.”
“If I have to use black magic on you to get the truth.”
“You’re not allowed anymore remember?”
“Lights out!” A guard yelled from outside.
“Grr.” Undertaker wasn’t done his questioning but left.

He found Austin next.
“Was it you?”
“Nope.”
“It better not be.”

The next day JR paid another visit to the Undertaker.
“Ah Mr Undertaker another package was delivered.” JR was shaking. They looked at the video tape of Sara swimming.
“Man.” Said Sara. JR was standing shaking for fear of his life.
“I know you wouldn’t do anything. You have no fear of my wrath JR. Leave now.” Said Undertaker.
“Thank you Undertaker.” JR left in a hurry.

A masked person came to Stamford Square to reveal himself to the Undertaker. He disguised his voice. Everyone watched on their tv’s not the slave area they couldn’t afford tv.
“Some people want to know who I am. There are two of us I have a partner.” Austin came out.
“I’m one of the people Undertaker.” Said Austin. The masked person was revealed to be Kurt Angle.
“It was me Undertaker. Austin and me were stalking in your wife and we’re not done yet.” Said Angle. They left Stamford Square.

“Wow.” Said Sara.
“They’ll pay.” Said Undertaker.
“I know.” Said Sara.
“From now on till I get this thing settled you go where I go.”
“Ok. Where you going now?” Asked Sara.
“To bed care to join me?” Asked Undertaker with a sly grin.
“Oh would I?” Asked Sara. Undertaker picked up his wife, they went upstairs and hit the hay again and again and again.

“Wow wasn’t expecting that.” Said Piper. Phoebe turned the channel.
“And now in local news the realms had a car accident outside of town.” Said the anchor woman. As the accident showed on tv. Paige went into a trance like state.
“Paige?” Asked Cole.
“Paige?” Asked Leo.
“Earth to our sister?” Asked Phoebe waving her hand in front of Paige’s eyes.
“Ah what?”
“You were off some place.” Said Piper.
“I have to go home to bed.” Said Paige. After she left Piper stated:
“I think it would be easier if Paige moved in here.”
“We can’t make her honey till she’s ready.” Said Phoebe.
“I wonder what’s wrong?” Asked Leo.
“I don’t know.” Said Piper.
“Would be interesting to find out.” Said Cole. Leo planned to do just that.

*Yes I know the stalkers were DDP and Austin was involved but I was never a fan of DDP so I made it Austin and Angle. No Kanyon either cause I’m not a fan of his either.

TBC.....

Chapter 39

While Piper was at P3 having a meeting with a new possible employee, Phoebe was out shopping Paige decided to stay home and bad guy hunt. That’s where Leo found her.
“Wanna tell me what happened?” He asked.
“What do you mean?” She asked.
“You stared at the news last night like you were someplace else.”
“Leo don’t tell anyone I don’t want to worry the girls.” Said Paige.
“Ok.”
“7 years ago my parents were killed in a car accident.”
“Your adoptive parents.”
“They were still my parents.”
“I know.”
“I know it’s my fault.”
“No it’s not you can’t control an accident.”
“I was a bad daughter.”
“Paige if I can prove it wasn’t your fault will it make you feel better.”
“Yes but I know you can’t.” Piper and Phoebe came home at the same time.
“Hey what’s up?” Asked Phoebe.
“Wait here I’ll be right back.” Said Leo.
“Ok honey.” Said Piper.
“I’m going upstairs to find some more spells to hunt bad guys.” Said Paige.
“What about Leo?” Asked Piper.
“Tell me when he gets back.” Said Paige going upstairs.

Leo found the Undertaker grabbing Stephanie by the throat.
“I warn you princess stay out of my way.”
“But Undertaker. I didn’t do anything.” She said batting her eyes at him but it had no effect. He let go when he saw Leo walk in the room. Leo patiently waited. Undertaker cupped
Stephanie’s chin.
“Between you and daddy trying to ruin people in this realm I have to fix things.”
“Daddy owns you Undertaker.”
“Nobody owns the Undertaker little girl.”
“Can I go?” She asked.
“Give him that message.”
“I will.” She left his house.
“Were you going to hurt her?” Asked Leo.
“I don’t hurt females.”
“You did at one time.”
“That was then.” Sara came in.
“Problem.” She said.
“One at a time.” Said Undertaker pointing to Leo.
“Ah well can you help?”
“What?” Leo told him. “I’ll do a spell so you can take her back to then.”
“Ok thanks. Thought you couldn’t use black magic anymore.”
“Don’t worry about it we got a system to get me out of jail.” Said Undertaker. Undertaker did what he had to do then Leo went to take Paige back in time.
“Now what’s up?” Asked Undertaker.
“Vince signed Regal to temporarily rule the realms.” Said Sara.
“You don’t say?” Asked Undertaker.
“You’re not worried?”
“I think this could work in our favour.” Raven knocked.
“Undertaker what did I tell you about using black magic unjust?”
“What do you have a spy?” Asked Undertaker. Raven arrested the Undertaker.

While Leo was helping Paige Piper and Phoebe were talking.
“Should we be here when she gets back?” Asked Phoebe.
“Yeah I couldn’t imagine what she’s going through right now.” Said Piper. They left the kitchen and waited in the livingroom. They didn’t have to wait for long.
“Well?” Asked Phoebe.
“It wasn’t my fault.” Said Paige sitting beside Piper and Piper putting her arms around her.
“I know honey it wasn’t your fault.” Said Piper.
“But they died knowing that I didn’t become a good person.” Said Paige.
“They know.” Said Phoebe trying to reassure Paige.
“How?” Asked a worried Paige.
“I’ll be right back.” Said Leo orbing out.
“Now where is he going?” Asked Piper.

Leo went to the Undertaker’s house.
“Where is the Undertaker?” Asked Leo.
“Arrested.” Said Sara.
“I knew that would get him into trouble.”
“I know and I’m supposed to go where he goes.”
“Until he destroys this stalking stuff?” The phone rang.
“Yes excuse me.” She went to answer it and soon after hung up.
“Who is it?” Asked Leo.
“Heavy breathing.”
“Come on.” Leo orbed himself and Sara out.

They went to Regal Jail (wonder why he’s made temporary runner of the lands.)
“What are you doing here?” Asked Undertaker.
“Hello to you to.” Said Sara.
“Watch.” Leo sent for Raven.
“Court order to let Undertaker out.” Raven looked at it.
“He’s free to go.” Leo orbed himself, Undertaker and Sara back home.

“What’s up?” Asked Undertaker.
“Can you make it where Paige can talk to her parents as ghosts.”
“I’m not going to jail again I’ll get Kane to do it.” Said Undertaker. Kane came downstairs.
“Did I hear my name?” Asked Kane. They explained what was needed and Kane set to work. Leo then orbed home.

“I have something for Paige.” Said Leo.
“What?” Asked Piper.
“Paige?” Asked her mother Tammy.
“Mom?” Asked Paige.
“You look so grown up.” Said Ron her father.
“Daddy?”
“It’s us.” Said Tammy.
“Mommy, daddy you didn’t get to see that I went to college and became assistant social worker.”
“We know.” Said Ron.
“How?”
“We were watching you.” Said Tammy.
“Really?” Asked Paige.
“Really.” Said Tammy and Ron together.
“We knew you grew to be a good person.” Said Tammy.
“I’m glad.” Said Paige.
“We love you.” Said Tammy.
“I love you to.” Said Paige. Tammy and Ron had to go back.
“See it’s not your fault.” Said Piper.
“I know now.” Said Paige hugging her sisters.
“I have one more thing to do.” Said Leo.

Leo found warden Regal and did a good spell on him.
“You are going to grant the Undertaker and Kane a fight to end the stalking once and for all.”
“I will grant the Undertaker and Kane a fight.” Said Regal. Leo orbed.

Regal went to Austin and Angle.
“Tomorrow you have a fight with Undertaker and Kane in a steel cage. They win the stalking stops.”
“You can’t do that.” Said Angle.
“Yeah I can I’m the temporarily guardian of the land.”
“Shit.” Said Austin.
“Poo poo my dear boy.” Said Regal leaving.


TBC....
Chapter 40
Blood Red Anger

Undertaker went to the McMahon house.
“I’m tired of being arrested.”
“Like Stephanie told you Undertaker I own your soul.”
“I told her nobody owns the Undertaker.”
“When you realize that deadman, then prove it at Stamford Square tonight.”

Vince sent for JR he knew that Undertaker would show up.
“JR I’m inventing a new thing.”
“What is that Vince?” Asked JR.
“I’m going to make you kiss my ass.”
“I’m not going to do that.” Said JR. Undertaker walked to the square.
“What’s going on here?” Asked Undertaker.
“Well what do you think Undertaker?” Asked Vince.
“He’s going to make me kiss his ass.” Noted JR.
“Is that right?” Asked Undertaker slyly.
“I’m not going to do it.” Said JR.
“Is that right?” Asked Undertaker.
“Yes he is.” Said Vince.
“Do you want to do it?” Asked Undertaker.
“Hello no!” JR made his statement loud and clear.
“You think you’re better then me JR?” Asked Undertaker.
“What?” Asked JR. Vince bent over and Undertaker made JR kiss Vince’s ass. The world knew that Undertaker and Vince joined forces again.

Afterwards Undertaker was confronted by Linda McMahon.
“Why did you do it Undertaker?” She asked and his reply:
“Why not?” He walked away.

He got home and Sara asked.
“Why did you do that?”
“Why do people ask me that?”
“No I mean it?”
“I’m tired of getting screwed around. Being a good guy doesn’t pay here and I should have figured that out.”
“Ok hope you know what you’re doing.” Said Sara.

Meanwhile Booker T a Wiccan was having trouble learning how to be a Wiccan. He was sitting in the Texan in a bar having a few beers when this pretty little woman went up to him.
“Hey baby.”
“Good thing you’re a witch to.” He said.
“I’m not worried. I like you.” Said Sharmell.
“I like you to.” He kissed her.
“What’s wrong?” She asked.
“Just worried baby.” He said.
“About being a witch?” She asked.
“Yeah don’t think I’m cut out for it.”
“Well I have someone we can talk to.” Said Sharmell.

Booker T and Sharmell went to find the charmed ones.

Regal decided to stay clear of Vince and the Undertaker. But to do that he had to have the good guys take them both down. He tried with Raven who decided to stop arresting people for using black magic and help the little guys.

Raven and Undertaker were in Stamford Square and Raven was reading poetry to the Undertaker. Undertaker looked at him.
“What the hell are you doing?”
“Reading Frost.” Said Raven. Undertaker took out Raven. Guess he wasn’t a fan of poetry.

Meanwhile Booker T and Sharmell talked to the charmed ones and Leo.
“You sure you want to do this?” Asked Piper.
“Yeah I can’t be a witch it’s just not me.” Said Booker.
“You know you’ll both be made a slave?” Asked Leo.
“We have eachother.” Said Sharmell.
“Ok then.” Said Paige.
“Let’s work on a spell.” Said Phoebe and they did.

Jeff and Lita went to the punishers to hunt out Matt.
“I have an idea.” Said Jeff.
“What?” Asked Matt.
“I’m going to turn the Undertaker good.” Said Jeff.
“Oh really little brother?” Asked Matt.
“I think he can do it.” Said Lita. Matt kissed Lita.
“Well guess we’ll have to help him.” Said Matt. Jeff went to tell the Undertaker the fight is on.

Would the Hardy’s and Lita win?

TBC.....

Chapter 41
A new Seer in Town

Cole Turner was called down to a bad area of the realms known to bad guy as Rock Hell.
“Who the hell are you?”
“I’m Shelly the seer.” Said the seer.
“Well what do you see?”
“I see you in power.”
“Of what?”
“Of everything, the realms.”
“I’m not interested.”
“You are the top bad guy and you can get rid of the charmed ones.”
“I decided to stay good because I’m in love with Phoebe.”
“You can be ruler and powerful magnet to all and still keep your love.” Said Shelly.
“What you say intrigues me but how do I do it?”
“Get her to marry you in a dark wedding that will over power the Undertaker’s dark rule.”
“He’s not dark anymore.”
“He will be I foresee it.” Said Shelly.
“What else do you foresee.”
“The rule of evil and the death of good forever.” They laughed evilly. Cole decided to help Shelly.

Phoebe went to the Undertaker.
“I want to talk to you.”
“What the hell do you want little girl?”
“You turning evil lost everyone hope that evil can be turned good or can be destroyed within people forever.”
“So?”
“When you were evil before then turned good that gave everyone hope.”
“You know what thought did.” Said Undertaker. The doorbell rang and it was Stephanie.
“Boo.” Said Stephanie to get Phoebe out.
“Think about what I said.” Said Phoebe leaving.
“What’s up?” Asked Undertaker.
“Two things, Jeff Hardy sent a message he wants to fight you in the square tomorrow night.”
“And the other?”
“It’s my birthday Undertaker.”
“Not having a good one?”
“HHH is goody two shows.” She pouted. Undertaker cupped Stephanie’s chin.
“Well I guess we’ll have to take care of that.” Undertaker and Stephanie left the house.

That night Cole and Phoebe were talking in the bedroom. He presented her with a ring.
“Will you marry me?”
“I don’t know Cole I don’t want to turn into Samantha.”
“Huh?”
“A character on tv. She married and became Mrs Darren Stephens.”
“You’ll be Mrs Cole Turner.”
“That’s what I’m afraid of being your wife and losing my identity.”
“It will never happen that’s tv this is real life.”
“I love you Cole.” They decided to get married the following week. Now Cole had to get Phoebe to agree in a Dark Wedding.

TBC.....

Chapter 42
Hardy’s vs Deadman

Stephanie and Undertaker sought out HHH.
“What the hell do you want?” Asked HHH.
“It’s not what I want it’s what she wants.” Said Undertaker pointing to Stephanie.
“You get married deadman and you turn into a wimp.” Said HHH. Undertaker beat the crap out of HHH then grabbed Hunter so Stephanie could have a go. Stephanie slapped him a few times.
“Take that for being good Hunter!” After he passed out from Undertaker’s blows Stephanie and Undertaker left the scene.

Matt found them.
“I wanna talk to you.” Said Matt.
“What boy?” Asked Undertaker in a mean way.
“Business bores me I’ll see you later Undertaker.” Said Stephanie kissing Undertaker on the cheek then leaving.
“What?” Asked Undertaker.
“Don’t fight my brother tomorrow night.”
“He wants a fight he gets one.”
“Jeff doesn’t know what he’s doing half the time.”
“That’s his problem.” Undertaker left but found his hog stolen. “Damn.” He said.

Meanwhile Shelly the seer paid Sara a visit.
“You’re husband’s cheating on you.”
“Who are you?”
“Never mind who I am he’s cheating on you with Stephanie McMahon.” Sara had no clue that the seer put a spell on her.

Matt got back to Jeff and Lita.
“Did you try to talk him out of it?” Asked Lita.
“Like you two said he wouldn’t go with it.”
“Good.” Said Jeff beaming from ear to ear.
“What are you so happy about?” Asked Matt.
“I stole Undertaker’s bike.” Said Jeff. Lita and Matt just burst out laughing they couldn’t help themselves.

Meanwhile Undertaker got home and he got slapped by his wife.
“What the hell was that for?”
“You’re cheating on me with Stephanie.”
“No.”
“Yes.” She ran upstairs and then came downstairs and gave him a blanket and pillow.
“What?” He asked holding his cheek.
“Mr cheater you sleep on the couch.” She went back upstairs and slammed the door again. Undertaker dropped the blanket and the pillow and left.

Cole and Shelly the seer were talking.
“What the hell was the purpose of telling the Undertaker’s wife he was cheating on her?”
“No telling it was a spell.” Cole wrapped his hand around Shelly’s neck. “If you kill me there goes your power.”
“I’ll survive will you?” He let go deciding his logic and her logic made too much sense. He had another plan he went back to Phoebe.

Undertaker found out it was Jeff that stole his hog. Before the fight he found Matt and Lita.
“Where is your brother?” Asked Undertaker.
“I don’t know.” Said Matt.
“You share everything?” Asked Undertaker.
“Huh?” Asked Matt. Undertaker beat the crap out of Matt. Lita went up to Undertaker.
“What the hell was that for?”
“Stay out of my way little girl. Tell him to give that to Jeff from me.” Undertaker left.

“Cole what’s wrong?” Asked Phoebe.
“Yeah don’t think Phoebe will want to get married if something isn’t going right.” Said Paige.
“Weird deja vu.” Said Piper.
“I can’t explain now but somehow Undertaker’s wife is under a spell thinking that her husband is cheating on her.”
“Well he is a man maybe he is.” Said Piper.
“What?” Asked Leo to Piper not believing that remark.
“Just saying.”
“No he’s under a spell.”
“Tell us what you know Cole.” Said Phoebe.

Jeff and Undertaker fought then when Jeff was just about passed out Undertaker picked him up fireman style and Lita came in.
“Undertaker stop!”
“Stay out of my way little girl.” He warned. Lita tried to physically stop him. Undertaker was going to throw Jeff down a hill.
“This is on you little girl.” He threw Jeff and Jeff went rolling down. Then Undertaker went over to Lita and grabbed her in the back of the neck and threw her with Jeff. Jeff faired better then Lita. Lita was out of commission for awhile.

Cole couldn’t expose Shelly the seer else it would expose him and then Phoebe would leave. Instead he implanted a spell in Stephanie’s brain.

While Lita was in the Heyman hospital Matt and Jeff were talking.
“I’m challenging the Undertaker again.” Said Jeff.
“No because of that Lita got injured.” Said Matt.
“This is for Lita.” Said Jeff.

Undertaker and Stephanie were having coffee at the Raw Coffee house.
“Did you take care of Jeff?”
“And Lita.” He nodded his head.
“That’s good Undertaker.”
“Now what?” He asked.
“How about your wife?” She asked.
“Excuse me?”
“I told her that we were sleeping together.” Undertaker’s eyes went buggy and grabbed Stephanie around the throat.
“You what?”
“You heard me.” Undertaker let go and left.

The spell gone Undertaker went to find his wife but Cole paid Dawn Marie to go after the Undertaker.
“Oh Undertaker honey I need you.” She tried to kiss him but he pulled away.
“Stay away from me.”
“But honey I want to sex you up.” She tried touching him but he pushed her away.

Cole found Sara.
“What do you want?” She asked. He waved his hand in front of her face to get rid of the spell.
“You want to save your marriage come with me.” Cole brought Sara to Dawn Marie and Undertaker.

“No I said I love my wife.”
“No you don’t.” Said Dawn Marie trying to kiss Undertaker but he kept pushing her way.
“You bitch!” Yelled Sara. Sara started to go after Dawn Marie and Cole left.

He found Stephanie and waved his hand in front of her face.
“Dawn Marie is the one that wants Undertaker.”
“What?’ She asked.
“Come with me.” Cole shimmered Stephanie and Stephanie helped Sara to go after Dawn Marie.

Cole went to visit Vince and put a spell on him.
“You are the one that told Sara that Undertaker is sleeping with Stephanie.”
“I’m the one that told Sara that Undertaker is sleeping with my daughter.” Affirmed Vince.

Sara, Stephanie and Undertaker went back home to switch on the tv.
“That took care of her.” Said Stephanie.
“I’m sorry that I thought you two were sleeping together.” Said Sara.
“Why did you?” Asked Undertaker.
“I don’t know I had this feeling come over me.” Said Sara. Vince was in the square talking on tv.
“Undertaker I told Sara that you were sleeping with my daughter!”
“What!” Yelled Sara and Stephanie back at the tv. Undertaker got up.
“I have something to do.”

Undertaker found Vince and Stacy Keibler together. She was in her bra and panties.
“Oh my god!” She yelled when she saw the Undertaker.
“No god little girl devil.” Said Undertaker. Stacy left the room with Vince’s coat. Vince had no idea why Undertaker was there. He guessed cause he was with Stacy.
“I know you don’t think Stacy and I should be together.” Undertaker wrapped his hand around Vince’s throat.
“Consider our partnership over.”
“What did I do?” Asked Vince. Undertaker left. He was now a good guy again.

Undertaker found Stacy.
“Don’t hurt me.” He backed her to the wall.
“You break up their marriage little girl and you will pay.”
“I’ll stay away from him I promise.” She ran out of there. Undertaker was happy he was a good guy again.

“How the hell did Undertaker become a good guy?” Asked Paige.
“Just straightened things out.” Said Cole.
“Are you saying it was Vince?” Asked Piper.
“Yeah.” Said Cole.
“I don’t buy that.” Said Paige.
“It’s true.” Said Cole.
“Why would he do that?” Asked Paige.
“I don’t know.” Said Cole.
“Oh honey I love you let’s get married as soon as possible.” Said Phoebe.
“Yeah.” Said Cole kissing Phoebe. Paige didn’t buy Cole’s nice guy act. Down in the hell section Shelly didn’t either. She knew better.

Vince found Paul Heyman his family owned the hospital.
“I want to team up with you.”
“What for?” Asked Heyman.
“To cause Undertaker nothing but trouble. Anything he fixes we break including my daughter Stephanie.”
“What does Stephanie have to do with it?”
“I think she turned on me and made sure Undertaker turned on me to.” Heyman and Vince agreed to work together.

TBC.....

Chapter 43
Wedding of Dark Proportions

Cole was in Rock Hell talking to Shelly the seer.
“In order for you to rule in a bad way you and your woman have to get married in a dark way.”
“How do you propose I do that?” Asked Cole.
“You figure it out.” Cole shimmered back home he knew how to do that.

Meanwhile Kane got home.
“Where were you brother?” Asked Undertaker.
“What the hell are you my keeper?” Asked Kane.
“You haven’t been home in a while what are you doing?”
“That’s my business.” Sara went up to Kane.
“Yuck he’s been drinking all night.” Said Sara.
“So what if I have?” Asked Kane going to the kitchen. Undertaker was going to follow him but Sara stopped her husband.
“I’m going to talk to my brother.”
“No I think this time sister in laws can do better.” She said. She walked to the kitchen and saw Kane getting some tomato juice.
“What do you want Sara?”
“Your brother was just a bad guy I don’t want you to turn into one to.”
“Why the hell should you care?”
“Because you and he can rule together.” Said Sara.
“Why the hell would I want to do that?” Kane walked upstairs.

“Did you pick up my dress?” Asked Phoebe.
“No.” Said Paige.
“What do you mean no? The wedding is in two days!” Yelled Phoebe.
“I know it was closed by the time I got there I’ll pick it up in the morning.”
“Paige!”
“Trust me Phoebe.” Said Paige.

The next day Paige picked it up, they took off the covering and found a different name on it courtesy of Cole.
“Shandah Mustapha? Do I look like a Shandah Mustapha to you?” Asked Phoebe. Cole came in.
“What’s wrong?” Asked Cole.
“Paige picked up the wrong dress.” Said Piper.
“No I didn’t.” Said Paige.
“Don’t look at it Cole!” Said Phoebe. Cole turned around.
“It’s the wrong dress I don’t think it matters.” Said Leo.
“It’s bad luck.” Said Phoebe. She went over to Cole. “Do I look like Shandah Mustapha to you?”
“What?” Asked Cole.
“See.”
“Ok try it on.” Said Paige.
“It’s not my dress and they are closed the rest of the day.” Said Phoebe.
“I know I’m going to fix it.” Said Paige.
“Ok Leo you take Cole downstairs.” Said Piper.
“Ok.” Said Leo as he and Cole went downstairs.

Kane was on a war path until Rob Van Damn a slave found him.
“What the hell do you want slave?”
“To talk please tonight.” Said Rob.
“You can’t you would need permission.”
“I know.”
“Go to my brother then we’ll talk.”
“Ok.” Said RVD.

“It’s too long!” Yelled Phoebe.
“I can fix it.” Said Paige.
“You better!” Yelled Phoebe.

RVD knocked.
“What?” Yelled Undertaker.
“It’s RVD sir, a slave permission to come in?” Asked RVD.
“Yeah.” Said Undertaker.
“Would you like something to drink?” Asked Sara. RVD got on his knees.
“No thank you ma’am.”
“Ma’am?” Asked Sara.
“Get up.” Said Undertaker.
“I can’t I’m not allowed.” Said RVD.
“Don’t worry about it get up.” Said Undertaker and RVD did.
“I would like permission to talk to Kane.”
“Why?”
“Because I think I can turn him around.”
“You have my permission.”
“Thank you master.” Undertaker held up his hand.
“Undertaker.”
“Thank you Undertaker.” RVD nodded at Sara. “Ma’am.” He left.
“What is with ma’am?”
“It’s the way slaves are taught.”
“I don’t like the idea of slaves.”
“Neither do I, it was Vince’s idea.”
“Where do they come from?”
“The neighbouring realm most of them, Cana, the rest are born into slavery.”
“That’s so sad.”
“I can’t abolish it here I don’t have that power but 4 years ago even when I was an evil guy I always tried to help the slaves as best I can.”
“Cana is our neighbours we have to.”
“It’s what’s right.” Said Undertaker.

“Did you fix it?”
“Well you’re wearing it.” Said Paige.
“Good.” Said Phoebe.
“You worry too much.” Said Piper.
“I’ll stay with this dress all night to make sure nothing else goes wrong.” Said Paige.
“You better.” Said Phoebe.
“What’s wrong with you she’s trying to help?” Asked Piper.
“She’s trying to sabotage this wedding.” Said Phoebe.
“No I’m not I swear.” Said Paige.
“We’ll see.”

RVD met Kane in the Boiler room a place for Dark people to be alone.
“What did you want Rob?”
“You don’t need the mask.”
“What?”
“I think that’s what’s restricting your freedom you wear a mask.”
“I can’t take it off I’ll scare people.”
“No you won’t.”
“Maybe.”
“Give an answer in the square on tv tomorrow night.”
“We’ll see.” They saw Cole down there.
“What are you doing here?” Asked RVD.
“Ah nothing.” Said Cole shimmering out.
“I thought this was a place for Dark people?” Asked RVD.
“It is something is up.” Said Kane. They parted ways.

Cole disguised himself as Piper and went into Phoebe’s bedroom and did a spell. Then he left. Paige woke up in the hall.
“Piper?”
“Go back to sleep.” Said Cole as Piper.
“How is Phoebe?”
“Good. You better not fall asleep again else Phoebe will have your hide.” Said Piper.
“Ok.” Said Paige sitting back down with the dress. Cole went to Piper’s room, saw Piper fast asleep, changed back into himself and shimmered.

Kane came home.
“What did he say?” Asked Undertaker.
“Turn on the tv tomorrow night I’ll give my answer.” Said Kane.
“Stay good.” Said Sara. Kane shrugged.
“Something fishy brother.” Said Kane.
“What?”
“Cole was down in the boiler room.”
“You don’t say.” Said Undertaker taking interest.

“Ahhhhhhhhh where is my face?” Asked Phoebe looking in the mirror. Piper and Paige came in. Phoebe turned around and the rest of her disappeared.
“Where is the rest of you?” Asked Piper.
“What do you mean?” Asked Phoebe.
“You aren’t there.” Said Piper.
“She did this she made me invisible.” Said Phoebe.
“No I didn’t.” Said Paige.

They knew they couldn’t have a normal wedding Phoebe went to Cole privately.
“I’ll do it your way. Just fix things.” Said Phoebe.
“Ok I’ll see what I can do.” Said Cole.

Cole went to Shelly the seer.
“Ok she’s agreed give me the antidote.” Shelly handled him a bottle.
“Here it is.”
“Ok I’ll get it done right now.” Cole and Phoebe got married in a dark way without her sisters or Leo there. Cole knew he didn’t get rid of Shelly though.

After they found out they eloped Paige went to the Undertaker.
“Can you see?”
“What?” He asked.
“Can you see Cole’s heart?” Asked Paige. Undertaker closed his eyes.
“I think you can see his heart.” Said Undertaker touching her forehead.
“I could for awhile but nobody will believe me.”
“Kane saw him in the boiler room.”
“I gotta go.” Paige orbed.

While Cole and Phoebe consummate their marriage Kane made an announcement on TV. He had Eric Bischoff the new GM of the realms and RVD there. He took off his mask. The whole of the realms was shocked to see Kane looking normal and not the monster he claimed he was.
“I hate everyone!” They got their answer and RVD was crushed he would have to stay in slave land.

Eric found Bradshaw visiting the Undertaker.
“Mr Undertaker, I hope to be working with you ver soon.” Said Eric. Undertaker just stared at him. He came from the Championship realms and didn’t belong here.
“You’re new here so I’ll save you the embarrassment of making the same mistake twice.” Said Bradshaw.
“What?” Asked Eric.
“That look the deadman’s giving you is fuck off!” Eric left he knew that Undertaker would be a problem.

TBC.......


Chapter 44
Taunting Kane

Flair met with Vince.
“I sold my part of the realms.” Said Flair.
“To who?”
“Guess.” Taunted Flair. Stephanie and Shane came in.
“Hi daddy.” Said Stephanie.
“Oh good we can rule together on the side of evil.” Said Vince.
“I don’t think you understand Vince.” Said Shane.
“I’m dad to you.”
“You’re Vince or Mr McMahon.” Said Shane.
“What don’t I understand?” Asked Vince.
“Well daddy we own half the realms.” Said Stephanie.
“And we’re working on the side of good.’ Said Shane. Vince slapped himself in the head he couldn’t believe it.
“Bye daddy.’ Said Stephanie.

HHH had to turn Kane to the side of good. One Brother of Destruction on the side of evil was bad let alone two. HHH made an announcement at Stamford Square on tv that night.
“Kane I know about you and Katie Vick, I can help you get back on track. This is part of your problem.” Said HHH.

Terri found Kane.
“What’s going on?”
“Something that happened a long time ago.” Said Kane.
“I wanna help.”
“No!” He left.

That night Kane did his own response.
“Katie and I used to be involved and she died.”

HHH went up to Kane privately in the boiler room again where Kane liked to hang out.
“Did you have fun with her after she was dead?” Asked HHH.
“You’re sick.”
“I’m trying to get you on the side of good.” Said HHH.
“It’s not working.” Kane took out HHH.

Undertaker then found HHH.
“What the hell are you doing?”
“Trying to help.” Said HHH.
“Bringing that up it’s not helping.”
“How do you know he won’t turn good and go after the bad guys?”
“Cause I know my brother.”
“What do you want me to do?”
“Nothing.” Undertaker beat the crap out of HHH to put him out of commission for a while.

Meanwhile Stephanie and Shane sought out someone.
“We want you to return.” Said Stephanie. The person they met agreed.

That night in Stamford Square live on tv Stephanie and Shane made an announcement.
“We have someone that is going to fight on the side of good.” Said Stephanie.
“You all know the show stoppa.” Said Shane. HBK came out.
“Well Vince I’ll be seeing you soon so you better stay good.” Said HBK.

Vince retorted with his own. The next night in Stamford Square on tv he made this announcement.
“I have someone on the side of evil.” A leggy blonde showed up. It was Sable.
“I’m back.”

“Oh no.” Said Undertaker spitting out his beer.
“Who is that?” Asked Sara.
“Trouble.”

Goldust and Booker T wanted to turn Kane good.
“What’s with you man?” Asked Booker.
“Nothing is with me.” Said Kane.
“Kane fight with us on the side of good.” Said Goldust. Kane grabbed Goldust around the throat.
“Quit laughing at me!” He left.

Undertaker phoned Kane.
“Brother I want to see you at the house.”
“I have my own house.” Said Kane.
“I know come over for supper Sara and I would want it.” Said Undertaker.
“Don’t laugh at me.” Said Kane.
“I won’t brother.” Said Undertaker.
“I’ll be there.”

Meanwhile Rock and Foley called Vince to Stamford Square.
“What do you want?” Asked Vince.
“We want to know is Vince what do you do in your spare time?” Asked Foley.
“What?” Asked Vince.
“You make life hell for people what else do you do?” Asked Foley.
“As a matter of fact I want to make babies with Linda.” Rock and Foley snickered.
“You wanna make babies with Linda? That must be hard to do when your cock a doodle do is small.” Said Rock. Having humiliated Vince Rock and Foley left laughing.

Before Kane made it over for supper Dawn Marie came over.
“Undertaker I need to ask a favour.”
“That’s what everyone says.” Said Undertaker.
“I want you to help me to fight.”
“Why me?”
“People say you are the man for the job. If a man or a gal comes after me I want to know how to fight.”
“Hey that’s a good idea I want to know stuff to.” Said Sara.
“Alright tomorrow I’ll start to train the both of you.” Said Undertaker.
“Thanks. It will be a pleasure working with you Sara.” Said Dawn Marie then she left. The doorbell rang again it was Kane.
“Hey brother.” Said Undertaker. Kane nodded.
“Sara.” Said Kane.
“Dinner is just about ready.” Said Sara. They were about to go to the diningroom when the doorbell rang again.
“Grand central station.” Said Undertaker.
“Ah what Mr Undertaker.” Said Stacy.
“What do you want?”
“Something I always wanted to know.”
“What?”
“Are you and Kane really brothers?” Kane and Undertaker broke out laughing.
“Ok then I’m leaving.” Stacy felt embarrassed.
“Let’s eat brother.” Said Kane.
“Ok brother.” Said Undertaker. While Undertaker and Sara tried to convince Kane to stay on the side of good at the Halliwell house they heard a noise as they were eating dinner.

“What is that?” Asked Piper.
“Sounds like it’s from outside.” Said Leo. They went to the window.
“Someone almost got ran over.” Said Phoebe.
“Where are you going?” Asked Cole.
“To help.” Said Phoebe. She got out there.
“Are you ok?” She asked the woman.
“Where am I?”
“On the street just getting run over but not bad.” Said Phoebe.
“I can’t remember they erased something.” Said the woman.
“Is she alright?” Asked a man.
“She will be.” Phoebe brought the woman inside to try and help her.

TBC.....

Chapter 45

The woman, the sisters, Leo and Cole were in the livingroom.
“Maybe we should take her to a hospital.” Said Leo.
“I gotta go I’m going to be late.” Said the woman.
“Wait late for what?” Asked Phoebe.
“I write a column for the newspaper I need to get it in.”
“Did you get it finished?” Asked Paige.
“No something stopped me, something evil my memory is so messed up.”
“What’s it about?” Asked Phoebe.
“People’s love lives.”
“What’s your name?” Asked Piper.
“Rosie, my name is Rosie.”
“Ok you have to stay here if something evil is out to get you.” Said Phoebe.
“No Pilar will have my ass that stupid bitch.”
“Boss?” Asked Paige.
“Yeah how did you know?”
“Just a guess.” Said Paige.
“Ok I’ll go write your column, you stay here with my sisters.” Said Phoebe.
“Don’t get me fired.” Said Rosie.
“I won’t do you have a list?”
“Yeah right here.” She dug in her purse and gave Phoebe a file full of letters from her readers.
“I’m going to check with the newest protector.” Said Leo.
“Who would that be?” Asked Piper.
“The Undertaker.”
“Does he know it?” Asked Paige.
“Not yet it’s up to me to tell him and tonight all of us have to coronate him.”
“Have fun.” Said Piper and Leo orbed out.
“I’m going to Rock Hell and see what I can find.” Said Cole.
“I’m going with you.” Said Paige.
“Why?” Asked Cole.
“Just because.” Cole and Paige orbed.
“Ok looks like you and me do you want something to drink?” Asked Piper.
“Do you have any tea?” Asked Rosie.
“I have lots take your pick.”

Cole and Paige got to Rock Hell.
“Why the hell did you go with me?”
“I don’t trust you.”
“I’m married to Phoebe and on the side of good.” Seer Shelly came along. She played along that Cole was good.
“Good hearts aren’t allowed in hell.” Said Shelly. Cole did a mock bow.
“Forgive us we are trying to find out something.”
“Find it fast and leave before you are found out.” Warned Seer Shelly. Thankfully for Cole Paige stopped asking questions.

Phoebe walked into the McMahon Paper (yes they owned that to).
“Hi excuse me who is Pilar?” Nobody was answering her. Then she had a tap on her shoulder.
“That would be me.”
“Ok my cousin Rosie got ran over this morning and I’m going to do her column for her.”
“There’s her office, get it done then.” Said Pilar. Phoebe went into her office.
“Man she is a bitch.” She sifted through the letters and started to give love advice.

Leo found the Undertaker at home.
“Need to talk to you.”
“Take a number.”
“What do you mean?”
“I got every slave, bad guy, good guy, and a McMahon coming to me for protection. Who the hell am I supposed to protect?”
“Well that’s a problem now cause you are a protector.”
“What?”
“Cause of the good you did in recent history you are now a protector.” Said Leo.
“Like you?”
“Yeah.”
“What about Sara?”
“She’s there to help.”
“Alright. Can I sick it to a bad guy?”
“Only if necessary you can’t do anything until they do something wrong.”
“Ok.” Said Sara.
“Great it seems everyone else found out before I did.”

Phoebe gave the column to Pilar and Pilar came to find her.
“This column.”
“Yes?” Asked Phoebe.
“Is fucking fantastic you’re hired.”
“No I’m only filling in today.”
“No you’re better then Rosie you are now hired.”
“Oh great.” Phoebe went home.

When she got home she found everyone at home again.
“Well I told the Undertaker.” Said Leo.
“How he take it?” Asked Piper.
“Better then I imagined.” Said Leo.
“Well it seems Vince made a deal with a black witch to get Phoebe.”
“Get Phoebe a new hair do right Cole.” Piped in Phoebe.
“No that’s not what I was going to say.”
“Always Vince.” Said Piper in disgust.
“We have to keep an eye on him.” Said Leo. Cole and Phoebe went into the hall.
“You have to tell her.”
“I know. I just don’t know how.”
“Just tell her.” They went back into the livingroom.
“Rosie ah they gave me your job.”
“Oh thank heaven.”
“Huh?” They all asked.
“I wanted to leave and I didn’t know how to tell that bitch Pilar.”
“You’re ok with this?” Asked Phoebe.
“Yes take it. It’s yours. Thank you.”
“You’re welcome.”
“So is she in danger?” Asked Paige.
“Ah no but Phoebe might be.” Said Cole.
“Well I’m a charmed one what do you expect.” Said Phoebe.
“You’re keeping the job?” Asked Piper.
“Yeah.”
“Even though Vince planned it that way?” Asked Leo.
“Yeah I want to help.” Said Phoebe.
“Thanks again.” Said Rosie leaving.
“Well I’m going to pick up the Undertaker for his coronation.” Said Paige.
“And his wife.” Said Leo.
“Ok.”

Paige found Undertaker and Sara at home.
“Why would Vince want Phoebe to take a job at the newspaper.”
“It’s his paper?” Suggested Undertaker.
“Yeah I know but I don’t get it.”
“Who knows what’s in his mind.”
“One more thing.” Said Paige.
“What?”
“Cole.”
“Yeah?”
“Is he evil?”
“I think you know the answer to that one.”
“Yeah I do. I have to take you both back for the coronation.” Said Paige.
“I’m ready.” Said Sara.
“Ok.” Said Undertaker.

Undertaker and Sara got the coronation and now Undertaker was the newest protector. Soon he would be protecting the person that needed the most protection.

TBC...

Chapter 46

Jeff went to his brother Matt.
“I’m leaving.”
“To go where Jeff?”
“The TNA Realms.”
“Good luck Jeff.”
“Let Lita know?”
“Yeah I will.” So Jeff left to go to a realm not that far away.

Torrie and Tajiri paid Undertaker a visit.
“You- protect.” Said Tajiri.
“What is he saying?” Asked Undertaker.
“He is asking if you’ll protect me and him.” Said Torrie.
“What are you together now?” Asked Undertaker. Torrie looked at Tajiri and Tajiri nodded rapidly. Undertaker couldn’t understand now that he was made a protector he had to go around protecting everyone so he decided to do it his way.
“Tell ya what meet me in the square if you prove your worth I’ll protect you.” Torrie translated for Tajiri. Tajiri nodded rapidly.

That night Undertaker and Tajiri fought and he did a good job.
“Well?” Asked Torrie.
“I’ll do it but stay out of my way.”
“Thank you Mr Undertaker.” Said Torrie.
“Thank Undertaker.” Said Tajiri bowing. Undertaker nodded and ushered them out. Leo got word of what Undertaker did.
“What did you just do?” Asked Leo.
“What?”
“You get a guy to fight you so you can decide that he’s worth protecting?”
“Yeah.”
“Don’t do that you have to protect the good guys and gals.”
“How am I supposed to be tough protecting people?”
“You’ll figure it out soon.”
“What is that supposed to mean?”
“You’ll see soon.” Said Leo.

After Leo left Undertaker Terri found Undertaker.
“What is it short and sweet?”
“Good to see you on the side of good.” She said. She then left.

Austin was buggin’ at who damaged him awhile back. He was going after everyone. He found Undertaker.
“Don’t even give me that look.”
“What look?” Asked Austin.
“That I did it look, you know very well that if I do anything to a person I do it to their face.”
“That’s true. So I heard you were a protector?”
“Don’t even laugh at that.”
“I’m not well if you hear anything of who got me let me know.”
“HHH.”
“He’s good though.”
“He was bad then.”
“I was bad then.”
“Exactly.” Austin scratched his bald head puzzled.

The next night at the local gym in the change room Undertaker got his first clue at the person he would soon need to protect. Paul Heyman who was now working with Vince came up to him.
“You know Mr Undertaker.”
“What the hell do you want?”
“It would be ashamed if a pretty little girl got injured real bad.”
“What are you talking about?”
“You’ll see.”

After Heyman left Undertaker he went to Vince.
“Did you give him the message?”
“Exactly how you told me to do Vince.”
“Good he’ll be surprised at who is next on the list.” Said Vince.

Undertaker called the girls of the realms in the square including Linda and Stephanie.
“Anyone get any threats recently?”
“No.” They all said.
“Are we in trouble Undertaker?” Asked Stephanie.
“Not with me but I got a clue that a female is next?”
“Who is it?” Asked Dawn Marie.
“I don’t know.”
“God I hope it’s not me again.” Said Sara.
“I don’t think so this time.” Said Undertaker. They were puzzled at who it was.

While Undertaker tried to figure that one out Shelly the seer paid a visit to vampire caverns on the dark side of town. She found the queen vampire.
“What do you want?”
“Hello to you to Cindy.”
“Well Shelly the seer?”
“To make a deal.”
“With who?”
“You.”
“What do you want?”
“I need you to get after the Undertaker.”
“How?”
“Make sure his wife thinks something is going with you two.”
“What’s in it for you?”
“He’ll need the charmed ones and I’ll need to split them up temporarily.”
“The charmed ones again I hate them.” Said Cindy the vampire.
“Do as I say and you’ll never have to deal with the power of three again.” They laughed evilly.

TBC...

Chapter 47
Vampires are us

Cindy the vampire paid Undertaker a visit alone, Sara was out shopping.
“Why is a vampire in my house?” He asked.
“Why don’t you ask me that later.” Said Cindy. She wrapped his arms around him and kissed him. The camera outside got that but didn’t get him pushing him away.
“Get off of me.”
“I want you Undertaker.”
“I’m not interested in any blood sucker.”
“If you become one of my kind we can rule together.”
“I’m home!” Yelled Sara coming in through the door. Cindy the vampire vamoosed. Undertaker found Sara and wrapped his arms around his wife.
“Thank god.”
“What’s up?” She asked puzzled.
“I missed you.”
“Got groceries to put away.”
“That could wait.” He picked up his wife lovingly and brought her upstairs.

The next morning the front page news at the Helmsley paper (HHH’s family) Undertaker and Cindy the vampire were on the front page. He spit out his coffee and tried to hide the paper.
“What’s going on?” Asked Sara.
“Ah nothing much how about you?”
“I mean what are you hiding?” He handed her the paper. He thought it would be best if he was truthful.
“You asshole!” She hit her husband on the head with the paper.
“I can explain.”
“Explain this!” She walked out. He didn’t know where she was going.

Sara went to the slave area. She knocked on Trish’s door.
“Can I stay with you?” Trish was unlocked from her shackles.
“You got 5 minutes.” Said the guard.
“But look who is here.” Said Trish. The guard saw Sara.
“I’m sorry ma’am do what you will with Trish.” Sara grabbed Trish’s hand and took her out of there.
“You bet I will.” Trish was liking that she was free even for a little while.

“You know Christian you’re not good for me anymore.” Said Edge.
“That so?” Asked Christian.
“Yeah you brought me in as a slave and now I’m going to be leaving.”
“How?”
“By making a deal.” Said Edge.
“You can’t leave without permission.”
“I’ll have permission.” Edge sent for his guard.

Undertaker went to the charmed ones.
“I need help.”
“With what?” Asked Piper.
“A vampire.”
“Interesting.” Said Phoebe. Undertaker showed them the paper.
“Did you do it?” Asked Piper.
“He didn’t do it.” Said Paige sticking up for him.
“No I didn’t. That was planted.”
“Why come to us?” Asked Phoebe.
“This is your area not mine.”
“So you want us to get rid of her?” Asked Piper.
“First I need a confession.”
“You’ll get your confession.” Said Paige.
“Ok I’ll think of a spell.” Said Phoebe.
“I’ll find the vampire.” Said Paige.
“Not alone.” Warned Piper.
“Yes alone.” Said Paige.

Paige had to prove that she was just as good as Prue. She went to find Cindy the vampire.
“Ok queenie come down.” Cindy the vampire changed to human in her cavern.
“So a charmed one.”
“Yeah a charmed one and you’re going to get your ass kicked.” Said Paige.
“Not the one I had in mind but you’ll do.” Cindy changed Paige into a vampire.

“Why are you a slave?” Asked Sara. She bought Trish an ice cream cone.
“The Canad realm was bought by this one, Vince made us all slaves, some of the people here though were born into slavery. Why are you fighting with the Undertaker?”
“He cheated on me with a vampire.”
“I happen to know since you came around he won’t touch another woman.”
“How do you know?”
“Would it surprise you that I tried?”
“Really?”
“He’s only interested in you.”
“Wow.” They continued to eat, walk and talk.

“I don’t like this she’s been gone too long.” Said Leo.
“I agree.” Said Piper.
“I’ll bring you down there.” Said Cole.
“It’s not safe.” Said Phoebe.
“I’ll risk it.” Said Cole.
“I’m going to.” Said Undertaker.
“No something bad could happen.” Said Piper.
“I need the confession.” Said Undertaker.
“You’ll get it.” Said Piper. All of them decided to go.

“So Undertaker changed your mind?” Asked Cindy the vampire.
“Not interested.” Said Undertaker.
“Too bad I think I have someone that could.” Said Cindy.
“No.” Said Undertaker folding his arms across his chest. Paige came out.
“Hello sisters.” Said Paige as a vampire.
“Ah vampire?” Asked Phoebe.
“Ah huh.” Said Piper. Paige tried to fight her sisters and Undertaker grabbed her. Leo had an idea.
“Stall them.” Said Leo to Cole then he orbed.
“No not him!” Yelled Cindy. “I get to change him.” Paige didn’t want to change him, she attacked him. He was injured.

“I want a job.” Said Trish.
“When this gets sorted out I think I can give you one.” Said Sara.
“Really?” Leo came in.
“Come with me.”
“Go back home I’ll find you.” Said Sara.
“Thanks.” Said Trish.

Sara and Leo orbed in just as Cindy was saying.
“Hey I changed you into a vampire to distract you and your sisters. I did the plant so I can keep him out of someone’s hair.” Said Cindy. Cindy didn’t notice Sara and Leo orb in but Piper, Cole and Phoebe did.
“Oh really so what were you going to do with him?” Asked Piper.
“Make him a slave.”
“So you have no cause to want the Undertaker?” Asked Phoebe.
“Not sexually just want him to do my bidding.” Said Cindy.
“Had enough of this.” Said Piper blowing Cindy the vampire up. Paige turned back into normal.
“What happened?”
“You ok?” Asked Phoebe. Sara went over to husband who was lying on the ground.
“You ok.”
“Yeah.” He touched her face.
“Leo.” Said Piper.
“I’m on it.” Said Leo. He fixed Undertaker up.

After Undertaker and Sara went home Paige asked.
“So I was a vampire?”
“Yeah.” Said Piper.
“Weird.” Said Paige.
“What?” Asked Phoebe.
“I want something raw.” Said Paige licking her lips.

Cole was down to see Shelly the seer.
“You sent her.”
“Right.”
“Why?”
“Once the Undertaker was down here you would own his soul, you have to take over.”
“I don’t want to take over if it means you are going to do that.”
“We will see.” Cole shimmered back to Phoebe.

Sara brought in Trish and Trish kneeled.
“Get up.” Said Undertaker. She did.
“Sorry.” Trish looked down.
“Look at me.” Said Undertaker.
“It’s ok.” Said Sara.
“Do you wish to be free?”
“Yes.” Said Trish.
“You can be the house made and my spy for the bad guys.” Said Undertaker.
“Agreed.” Said Trish. She shook on it. Edge knocked.
“Undertaker.”
“Edge.”
“I want to break free from the spirit world.”
“You can be the limo driver and spy on the bad guys.”
“Agreed.” The door knocked and Sara answered.
“It better not be anyone else.” Said Undertaker.
“A note.” Said Sara. The note said.
“A girl is next beware Undertaker.”
“Not again.” Said Undertaker.
“I’ll find out who it is.” Said Edge.
“No I can’t explain why you’re out so I’ll do it.” Said Undertaker. Question is how was he going to do that?

Chapter 48
I go Billy Jack on your ass

Vince was talking to Albert.
“Did Undertaker figure out Stephanie’s next on the list?” Asked Albert.
“No I think I need you to send him a message.”
“Through Stephanie?”
“Oh yeah, here’s what I want you to do.” Said Vince.

Stephanie was in Keibler clothing store.
“You know your dad is cute.” Said Stacy.
“Ya ok.” Said Stephanie.
“Undertaker told me to stay away from him.”
“Maybe he’s right, my dad is bad news.” Said Stephanie. She left with a bag full of clothes.

Albert aptly nicknamed A Train found her. He grabbed her arms.
“Where are you going Stephanie?”
“Leave me alone.”
“Why I thought we can go on a date.”
“Your one of my father’s henchmen.”
“So?”
“Not interested.”
“Maybe I’ll make you interested.” He tried to kiss her and she struggled. Her bag dropped out of her arm.
“No leave me alone!” She yelled. He slapped her across the face hard. She managed to get out of his grasp and ran away without her bag.

Albert picked up the bag to give to Vince.

Stephanie knocked on Undertaker’s door and Trish answered. Stephanie was holding her cheek.
“Stephanie what’s wrong?” Asked Trish.
“What are you doing here?” Asked Stephanie.
“Undertaker and his wife freed me.”
“Are they here?”
“Yeah I’ll get them.”
“Ok.”
“Sit in the livingroom.”
“Thanks Trish.” Trish went upstairs.

She knew Mr and Mrs Undertaker were in the bedroom she heard the noises. She knocked.
“I’m sorry to bug you but Stephanie’s down here crying. I think she’s been hurt she’s holding her cheek.”
“Shit. That’s the clue. Trish tell her we’ll be right down.” Said Undertaker.
“Ok.” Trish went downstairs.

After Trish delivered the message she made Stephanie some hot tea. Undertaker and Sara came down after they got dressed.
“Are you ok?’ Asked Sara. Undertaker pushed Stephanie’s hand away and whistled under his breath.
“Who did it?” He saw the bruise forming.
“Albert, A Train.” Undertaker growled.
“Be careful.” Said Sara. Undertaker went to the kitchen and a minute later Sara and Stephanie heard stuff breaking.
“I’m sorry.” Said Stephanie.
“It’s not your fault a guy hurt a girl and now he’s pissed.”
“Maybe I shouldn’t have come here.”
“No, no, you should have.” Said Sara. Undertaker came in.
“I’m sorry Undertaker.” Said Stephanie. He held up his hand and shook his head.
“Feeling better?” Asked Sara.
“I will when I take care of some business.” Said Undertaker leaving the house. They heard his hog and they knew what he was going to do.

“Keibler clothing store huh?” Asked Vince.
“Yup that’s what the bag says.” Said Albert.
“Tomorrow you are going to fight Stephanie in Stamford Square.”
“Ok.”
“Undertaker you can’t come in here!” Yelled Kurt Angle from the front hall. A train hid in the shadows. Undertaker grabbed
Vince by the collar.
“You better start talking!”
“About what?” Asked Vince innocently.
“Why did you send A Train after your daughter.”
“I didn’t.”
“Bullshit he’s too dumb to do it by himself. What the hell do you want?”
“You on my side.”
“Fuck you Vince.”
“Well then Stephanie pays and pays dearly.”
“What do you mean?”
“She’s going to fight Albert in the square tomorrow. You can bring her the news.” Undertaker left trying to figure out a way to tell Stephanie that.

“God I feel awful.” Said Phoebe.
“Here is some herbal tea for you.” Said Paige.
“Thanks.” Said Phoebe. As Paige sat down Phoebe hit her across the face.
“Whoa!” Said Piper.
“Bitch.” Said Phoebe.
“What the hell?” Asked Paige standing up.
“I don’t know it’s like I had no control.” Said Phoebe.
“I’m getting the hell out of here.” Said Paige going upstairs.
“I think you should go to the doctor.” Said Leo.
“Ya but don’t tell Cole not yet ok?” Asked Phoebe.
“She can’t go to a normal doctor.” Said Piper.
“I know I’ll find a magical one for her.” Said Leo. Leo orbed to do just that.

Why was Phoebe hitting Paige all of a sudden?
Will Undertaker save Stephanie?

TBC....

Chapter 49
Pregnant!

Leo found the Undertaker.
“Need help.” Said Leo.
“Busy helping Stephanie.” Said Undertaker.
“This won’t take long.”
“What do you need?”
“I need a person to tell me if Phoebe’s pregnant.”
“You been playing around?”
“Ya ok. No, she’s doing weird things.” Sara came in at that remark.
“Hi.” Said Sara.
“Hi.” Said Leo.
“She’s doing weird things, hate to break it to you but women do weird things all the time doesn’t mean she’s pregnant.” Said Undertaker and Sara playfully slapped him.
“Hey.” Said Sara to her husband.
“Well?” Asked Leo.
“Ask Kane I can’t do that unless I crossover and your girls binded my dark powers.” Said Undertaker.
“Kane is evil.” Said Leo.
“I’ll bring you to him.” Undertaker and Leo orbed to where Kane was at his own home.

“What do you want brother?” Asked Kane.
“Take off your mask and you’re getting cheeky. Do a pregnancy test.”
“On him?”
“Oh very funny Kane one of the charmed ones.”
“Why should I?”
“Because.” Said Undertaker.
“Go to a doctor.” Said Kane.
“It needs to be done magically.” Said Leo.
“Why?” Asked Kane.
“Just in case.”
“Of what?”
“She’s carrying the devil’s child.” Leo and Undertaker looked at him.

When Leo orbed Kane to Phoebe’s and Cole’s house Phoebe wanted to be alone with him.
“Don’t hurt her.” Said Leo.
“I won’t.” Said Kane pushing Leo out. After Leo left Phoebe asked:
“Where do you want me?”
“Under any other circumstances I would be asking you that.”
“It’s not funny.”
“Didn’t mean it to be. Lay down on the bed.” Phoebe took Kane to the bedroom and she laid down. Kane did some dark magic to find out.

“Well?” Asked Piper.
“She wanted to be alone with Kane.” Said Leo.
“Is that a good idea?” Asked Paige.
“I’m going to get a spell ready in case he tries something.” Said Piper going upstairs.
“Leo you think she’s impregnated by Cole and you think Cole is a demon don’t you?” Asked Paige.
“Not a demon, the demon.”

Later on Paige and Piper visited Phoebe. Cole wasn’t back yet from a case he was working on.
“I’m pregnant.” Said Phoebe.
“Is this a good thing or bad thing?” Asked Piper.
“Good thing but don’t tell Cole I have to tell him.” Said Phoebe.
After they talked Piper and Paige went into the hall to wait for the elevator.
“She’s pregnant with the devil’s son.” Said Paige.
“Oh stop.”
“Ask your husband.”
“I’m going to ask Kane.” Said Piper. Paige orbed them both to where Kane was. To his house.

“What now?” Asked Kane.
“We want to know if she’s carrying the devil’s child?” Asked Paige.
“I can’t keep being nice it will ruing my image.” Said Kane.
“We won’t tell anyone.” Said Piper.
“Yes.”

The next morning Phoebe after telling the happy Cole she was pregnant came over for breakfast. Paige came out with some eggs and juice.
“Happy pregnancy.” Paige and Piper both knew they had to keep it a secret for now that Cole was a bad guy again.
“You don’t have to hide it, Cole is the devil demon isn’t he?” Asked Phoebe.
“How did you know?” Asked Piper.
“I suspected for awhile. But I didn’t know what to do.” Said Phoebe.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Piper.
“I’m in love with him.” Said Phoebe.
“You don’t want that.” Said Paige. Without warning Phoebe kicked Paige and the eggs and juice ended up on herself.
“You cunt!” Yelled Phoebe.
“Hey!” Yelled Paige.
“It’s the baby I have no control.” Said Phoebe.
“Ok Paige in the kitchen.” Said Piper.
“She kicked me.” Said Paige.
“No the baby did.” Said Phoebe. Paige orbed to the kitchen.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Piper.
“I’m in love with Cole I’m keeping this baby.” Said Phoebe leaving to go back home.

While Phoebe struggled that she was carrying a devil baby Stephanie was fighting Albert in the square. Vince was cheering on Albert. Stephanie nearly beaten left but she could barely walk. She knew this wasn’t the last of what daddy was going to do. Undertaker then came out, picked up Stephanie in his arms and she gratefully wrapped her arms around his neck.
“Thank you.”
“I’m taking you home.”
“Who’s home?”
“My home.” Undertaker took Stephanie home he also knew it wasn’t over. Sara had a hot bath waiting for Stephanie when her husband brought her home.

TBC.....

Chapter 50
How to save a Princess

Stephanie woke up in the morning refreshed like her battle with Albert never happened. She saw Undertaker and Sara in the diningroom eating.
“Morning.” Said Sara.
“How you feel princess?” Asked Undertaker.
“Stop calling me that, you called me that when I was a bad girl, and I feel fine.”
“I’ll get you something to eat.” Said Sara.
“Just coffee please.” Sara went to get the coffee.
“Ok Stephanie.” Said Undertaker.
“Thanks.”
“You’re not leaving my site.”
“I’m going back home today, you have your life to live and I can’t keep butting in.”
“I’ll take you home.” Stephanie had her coffee then Undertaker took her home.

“Oh my god Stephanie are you ok?” Asked Linda.
“Yeah mom I’m fine.” Stephanie hugged her mother.
“Thank you Undertaker.” Said Linda.
“Watch tv at 6 tonight you’ll hear a message from the square.” Said Undertaker.
“Stephanie go upstairs I want to talk to the Undertaker.” Said Linda.
“Ok mama.” Stephanie went upstairs.
“Do you know what Vince has planned?”
“No.”
“Undertaker I want you to protect Stephanie.”
“That’s what I been doing.”
“I know at all costs I have no idea where Vince’s mind is anymore.”
“What do you mean?”
“Stephanie didn’t tell you?”
“No.”
“She arranged a fight with Vince next month.”
“She and him?”
“Yes.”
“Does she know what she’s doing?”
“She thinks she’s protecting her family.”
“Guess I’ll have to do something about that.” Undertaker left.

Before Undertaker was due to give his message to the realms in the square Tazz and Michael Cole got there.
“Ok Cole what gives?” Asked Tazz.
“I have no idea.”
“Did you get a note from deadman?”
“Yeah Tazz guess we have to do what we have to do.”

Undertaker got there and it was televised.
“Undertaker what do you think about Stephanie fighting her own father?” Asked Tazz.
“Vince is dangerous. He hurts people and it’s time he’s stopped hurting.”
“How?” Asked Cole.
“I’ll make sure of it. Vince wherever you are and whatever you do I’ll be there to make sure you pay.” Said Vince.

Sable and Vince was watching the telecast in his office downtown.
“Are you scared of the Undertaker?”
“No.” They started pawing eachother.

The next month Stephanie had to deal with Albert but Undertaker found Vince and Sable together.
“Go!” Said Undertaker.
“I don’t have to.” Said Sable.
“I think you do slut.” Said Undertaker.
“Hey.” Said Sable. Undertaker glared at her and she left.
“What the hell do you want?” Asked Vince.
“You hurt Stephanie and you’ll pay.” Said Undertaker.
“You think you are high and mighty?”
“Vince everyone pays in the end for their actions. You set up your own daughter against a big guy like A Train so you can have everything you want, including your oral hoochie.”
“You don’t understand Undertaker Stephanie is going to pay and there is nothing you can do about it you’ll be too busy.”
“What do you mean?”
“When I fight Stephanie tonight you’ll be in the hounds of hell fighting the new demon in disguise Cole Turner.” Undertaker left.

Undertaker went to the charmed ones. All but Phoebe was there. He saw Cole.
“We have a fight tonight.” Noted Cole.
“I know.” Said Undertaker.
“You don’t have to worry I’ll lose gracefully.” Said Cole.
“What do you mean?” Asked Piper.
“I mean I have to prove to Phoebe I can have bad guy powers but still be a good guy.” Said Undertaker.
“What I need you to do is do a good show, long enough for Stephanie to have her battle. When it’s done I need her transported here I don’t think she’ll be ok after this one.” Said Undertaker.
“Don’t worry about it I’ll save her.” Said Leo. Phoebe came in.
“Oh hi Undertaker.” He nodded. “Cole can you give me some ice cream with pickles and peanut butter please?” Cole and Undertaker and Leo made a face.
“Ah yeah right away dearest.”
“Ok I’ll be upstairs in the bathroom a million times today.” Phoebe went upstairs.
“You’ll be there?” Asked Undertaker.
“I’ll be there but who will take care of you?” Asked Leo.
“I’m 6'10 I don’t need to be taken care of.” Said Undertaker.

That night Stephanie had her battle and she was injured. Linda stopped it but it was too late. Leo transported Stephanie and Linda to Halliwell Haven. Paige brought Undertaker there after to fix his small injury. Cole followed shortly.

Shane found Kane.
“Kane work with your brother.”
“Why should I Shane?”
“So you can rule and my father will pay.”
“Maybe I want to be on your father’s side.” Kane walked away. Shane didn’t know what to expect.

Will Kane stay on the side of evil or join with his brother the Undertaker?

TBC...

Chapter 51
To death do us part

Paige and Piper went to Phoebe’s condo. Cole was working on a case apparently.
“How are you doing?” Asked Piper.
“Ok I guess, I keep eating weird.” Said Phoebe.
“Ya I guess you do I mean tuna and ketchup?” Asked Paige. Phoebe back handed Paige.
“You whore!” Yelled Phoebe.
“Ok baby back off.” Said Piper to Phoebe’s stomach.
“I feel bad.” Said Phoebe.
“You need to go to the washroom?” Asked Paige keeping her distance.
“No I mean I feel bad that the baby keeps taking control.”
“I want to know why he keeps coming after me.” Said Paige.
“Maybe cause you hate his father.” Said Phoebe.
“What?” Asked Piper.
“I don’t hate his father.” Said Paige.
“Yeah you do, give Cole a chance he changed.” Said Phoebe.

Leo meanwhile was jamming with the Undertaker.
“What are you doing?” Asked Leo.
“Following Stephanie around town.”
“You don’t have to.”
“Yes I do, in case Vince does more.”
“She’ll call you you’re a protector.”
“I don’t know if she will. What do you want?” Asked Undertaker eyeing the store that Stephanie was in. He was on the outside with Leo.
“There could be a possibility that Phoebe might leave Cole or worse.”
“Like what?”
“She’s a charmed one she might kill evil.”
“Why did she marry him?”
“She loves him?”
“Does she know he’s evil.”
“She knows.”
“Doesn’t change?”
“No, but if she decides to get rid of Cole I need you to do a healing thing.”
“Why me?”
“You’re a protector.”
“You’re they’re protector.” Said Undertaker.
“I’m too close to the situation.” Said Leo.
“Ok.” Stephanie left the store not noticing Undertaker following her.
“Little tip.” Said Leo to Undertaker as they began to walk.
“What?”
“Tell her you’re protecting her.”
“I like this way.”
“She may not like it in the end.”
“I think you’re right.” Leo left and Undertaker went to talk to Stephanie.

The next morning Shelly the seer paid Phoebe a visit.
“Drink this.” Said Shelly.
“You been giving me it since I became pregnant what is it?”
“It’s a tonic.”
“For what?”
“Your baby.”
“Are you trying to poison me?”
“No it’s vitamins?”
“Leave me alone I’ll drink it.” Shelly nodded and left. Phoebe threw it down the toilet.

Shelly visited Cole at his office where he was talking to some bad guys.
“Ok leave.” They left.
“Sorry to bother you here master.”
“Never bother me while I’m working.”
“It’s about your woman.” Said Shelly the seer.
“What do you mean?”
“She won’t drink the tonic.”
“I’ll take care of it.”

Phoebe was at work when Cole paid a visit.
“Someone could have saw you enter that way.”
“I was being careful.” Said Cole.
“What do you want?”
“Why didn’t you drink what Shelly was giving you?”
“She’s trying to poison the baby.”
“No she’s not she’s trying to make sure you’re on my side.”
“Cole you didn’t trust me?”
“If you go in both directions it will rip you apart.”
“You just made the decision for me now leave.” Cole shimmered out.

Cole went to Halliwell Haven as Phoebe.
“Join the side of good yet?” Asked Piper.
“Cole is evil we have to kill him.” Said Cole as Phoebe.
“You sure you want to do that?” Asked Paige.
“Yeah.” Paige took Piper into the kitchen.
“What?” Asked Piper.
“The baby didn’t try to do me in.”
“Maybe Phoebe talked to it.” Said Piper.
“Yeah maybe.” They went back into the livingroom.
“We gotta stop him right away before he goes back to McMahon.” Said Phoebe.
“I agree.” Said Piper.
“I can’t feel about this right now let’s get it over with.” Said Cole as Phoebe.
“Ok lets go upstairs.” Said Paige. As they were going to Cole shimmered back into himself and grabbed Piper around the neck.
“Cole what the?” Asked Piper.
“Ok Paige you go to Leo and the Undertaker and tell them to stick their noses out of my business.” Just then Phoebe entered and as she turned around to shut the door behind her Cole shimmered out of there without Piper.
“Hi we need to stop Cole.” Said Phoebe.
“How do we know it’s you?” Asked Paige. Phoebe kicked Paige in the stomach.
“Oh god I’m sorry.” Said Phoebe.
“It’s her.” Said Piper. Piper helped Paige off the floor and the three of them continued to put an end to Cole.

Leo went to see Kane.
“I need help.”
“No.” Said Kane.
“How do you stop evil?”
“You can’t stop me.”
“No all evil. Cole?”
“You tell one word of me helping and I’ll be all evil.” Warned Kane.
“Ok.” Kane gave Leo a spell.

“How are we going to do it?” Asked Phoebe.
“I don’t know, I can’t find a spell.” Said Piper. Leo orbed in.
“I have one.” They were grateful.

The charmed ones went back to Phoebe’s condo and found Cole.
“I know why you are here.” He said.
“Do you?” Asked Phoebe.
“To put an end to me.” Said Cole.
“You’re right.” Said Piper.
“Do it.” Said Cole.
“What?” Asked Paige.
“As far as I know you can’t. But you can try.”
“We will.” Said Phoebe. They threw the potion and said the spell.
“I love you Phoebe!” The apartment was a mess and Cole was gone thanks to Kane.

The next day Leo found Piper at the bottom of the steps. They heard Jewel’s foolish games coming from Phoebe’s room a hundred times that day.
“You going up there?” Asked Leo.
“I don’t know what to say to her.” Said Piper.
“She needs to heel.”
“I know.” Said Piper. Paige came in.
“Man I hate that song.” Said Paige.
“I have a way to help.” Said Leo. The doorbell rang and Leo let in Undertaker and Sara.
“Wow nice house.” Said Sara.
“What are you doing here?” Asked Piper.
“I was asked.” Said Undertaker going upstairs.

He got into Phoebe’s room and turned off the cd player.
“I hate that song.” She wiped away her tears.
“What do you want?” Asked Phoebe.
“It’s time to heal.” He stated as he set out to do his work.

After Undertaker and Sara left Piper and Paige went upstairs.
“I hurt so much.” Said Phoebe in tears again.
“We know honey.” Said Piper laying behind Phoebe and wrapping her arms around her sister. Paige laid in front of Phoebe and Phoebe put her arms around Paige.

*I’m getting operated on tomorrow morning so the next chapter won’t probably be till Saturday I’ll see how I feel.

TBC....

Chapter 52
On and On and On

Vince had it in for HHH as well turning goody, goody. Stephanie knew it. She went to HHH.
“Hunter.”
“What?”
“Be careful.”
“What do you mean?”
“My father he’ll be after you.”
“I have a way to deal with your father.” Hunter got into the limo.

He went to see Flair.
“You want a way to get back at Vince?” Asked HHH.
“How?” Asked Flair.
“Turn evil.”
“Work with him?”
“For a short time, you and I are going to form our own group to go after Vince and whoever else we want.”
“Ok.” Flair and HHH shook hands on it.

Meanwhile Vince sent for Undertaker.
“You want it to end?” Asked Vince.
“What do you think?”
“One last fight for Stephanie’s soul.”
“I don’t want her soul, that was years ago.”
“I do, if you win you get to do what you want with her and I mean anything.”
“I’m married.”
“Like I said anything.”
“What do you want?”
“Well?”
“No deals.” Undertaker left and Vince said to himself.
“You’ll deal Undertaker.”

HBK found Hunter.
“Word is you turned bad.”
“Is that so Shawn?”
“Yeah.”
“Well don’t believe everything you hear.” The next night Shawn Michaels got hit behind with a sledgehammer.

Michael Cole went to the Undertaker.
“It seems that you have a fight with Cena tomorrow.” Said Michael Cole.
“Is that right?” Asked Undertaker not worried.
“Any words?”
“Michael Cole, John Cena keeps writing cheques that his mouth can’t cash. I’ve had more shower time then he has had ring time.” Undertaker walked away.

Meanwhile HHH announced to the realms on tv something.
“I have something to say. I’m the one that got Shawn Michaels on the back of the head with a sledgehammer.”

“Shit.” Said HBK from his home.

“I did it cause he’s no good. And I started a new group. With Ric flair, Randy Orton and Dave Batista.” The other three came out. Flair then said:
“It’s a pleasure working with you Hunter.” Goldberg came out.
“Well, HHH it will be a pleasure kicking your ass.” Goldberg kicked all of their asses.

The night Undertaker had to fight Cena, Cena made fun of him and Undertaker kicked his ass. Vince said from a nearby connection.
“Undertaker look!” Undertaker looked on a screen and saw Sable going after Stephanie. Undertaker went to save Stephanie.

A block away Sable got out of there while Undertaker helped Stephanie up.
“Undertaker watch out!” He looked but it was too late. A Train, Cena and the Big Show went to Undertaker.

After they took care of Undertaker, Vince went to Big Show.
“Why did you help?”
“I’m sick of the Undertaker.” Said Big Show.
“Good to have you on my side.” Said Vince.

Meanwhile HHH found Kane.
“What do you want?”
“I didn’t think you would be on my team so I didn’t ask you, but I want you to go after Stacy?”
“What’s in it for me?”
“My promise my new group Evolution will protect you.”
“I don’t need protection.”

Stacy Keibler got a note to go to Stamford Square. After Kane went after her Nash and Goldberg came out. Nash got Stacy out of there and Goldberg looked at Kane.
“Are you crazy?”
“Yes.” Replied Kane.
“With what you can do you and I can stop Hunter and his group.”
“I don’t want to.” Kane left.

Nash talked to Stacy in the back.
“You ok?”
“Yeah what was that for?” Asked a confused Stacy.
“Nothing stick by me and I’ll protect you.”
“Ok.” Said Stacy. Soon after Nash was taken out and Vince banned him from the realms. Stacy stayed hidden for a while.

Vince and Heyman was having a meeting.
“I have something that can make sure the Undertaker either suffers for good or turns him to your side.” Said Heyman.
“What do you mean?” Asked Vince.
“Brock Lesnar.” Brock came out and Vince was impressed.

Brock went after Undertaker in Stamford Square and Undertaker’s old acolytes Faarooq and Bradshaw came out to save him.
“Thanks.” Said Undertaker.
“No problem man.” Said Faarooq.
“Yeah good to be back in action.” Said Bradshaw.

There was a feed on the Stamford Square tv. Michael Cole was talking to a very large, but muscled and thin bald man with an accident.
“I’m looking for one man.” Said the large man.
“Who is that?” Asked Michael Cole
“The Undertaker.” Undertaker, Faarooq, and Bradshaw looked at the screen trying to figure out who was the dude looking for Undertaker.

Chapter 53
Discovered

“Phoebe.” Phoebe woke up to someone in her room calling her name.
“Cole?”
“Phoebe.” It was in the middle of the night when she heard the whispers.

In the morning Paige and Leo and Piper were in the kitchen. Phoebe came in and went straight for the coffee.
“Coffee, coffee, coffee.” Said Phoebe.
“Hello to you to sunshine.” Said Piper.
“It’s not funny.” Said Phoebe.
“What’s wrong?” Asked Leo.
“I think Cole tried to contact me in the night.” Said Phoebe.
“How?” Asked Paige.
“I hear him whispering.”
“It’s probably nothing but I’ll....” Said Leo not being able to finish cause Piper finished for him.
“You’ll talk to the Undertaker.” Said Piper.
“Right.” Said Leo orbing.

Meanwhile a pizza van outside was watching Halliwell Haven. The phone rang from inside and agent Jackman picked it up.
“Jackman here?” Too much feedback. “Yes Mr McMahon I’m right on it, trust me I know what I’m doing.”

“Do you know what you’re doing?” Asked Hunter.
“Having the charmed ones watch HHH? Of course, if I can get something on them then they’ll be out of my hair and evil will rule.”
“And you’ll have the Undertaker again.” Noted HHH.

“Stay away from Vince.” Warned Undertaker.
“I plan to but how does a dead man contact a live woman.”
“Vince has to give the ok.”
“How?”
“Through a black witch.”
“It could be anyone.” Said Undertaker. Kane opened the front door.
“You’re being watched.”
“What?” Asked Leo.
“Outside your house.” Said Kane. Leo orbed.
“You’re funny brother.” Said Undertaker.
“What do you mean?”
“You claim you’re evil but you keep doing nice things.” Said Undertaker.
“Yeah don’t spread it around.” Said Kane.

Leo pointed to the attic and they went up there for a family meeting. Leo put on Metallica real loud. Piper turned it down.
“What?” She asked.
“We’re being watched.” Said Leo pointing to the pizza van. They looked out the window and then quickly went away from the window and put on Metallica again.

“Damn can’t they listen to anything else?” Asked Jackman. He picked up the phone.
“McMahon here?” Asked Vince.
“You’re found out.”
“Go for the kill.”
“Ok.” Agent Jackman left the van.

“He’s coming this way.” Said Piper. They looked out the window and a minute later the doorbell rang.
“Now what?” Asked Phoebe.
“We’re going to see what he wants.” Said Paige leading the way.
“I don’t think it’s a good idea.” Said Leo following Paige, then Piper.
“I’m going to find Cole.” Said Phoebe who got Leo to orb her out of there.

Meanwhile Vince was talking to A Train and Big Show.
“I want you to go after Stephanie.” Said Big Show.
“I’m not marrying her.” Said A Train.
“Make it look like you are going to rape her.” Said Vince.
“Ok.” Said Big Show.
“And let her get away.” Said Vince.
“Ok.” Said A Train.

“Ok who are you and what do you want?” Asked Piper ready to go after Jackman.
“I’m agent Jackman and I need your help.”
“What kind of help?” Asked Paige.
“Witch help.”

“What the hell do you want Cole?” Phoebe found Cole in another world.
“I want you back.” Said Cole.
“It’s over I killed evil.”
“I know that’s why I want you back, you killed the evil in me.”
“No I didn’t, I had to kill you to kill evil don’t you get it?”
“Yes and I love you I need you.”
“Why are you in this plane?”
“Because it’s not time for me to go.”
“Who gave you the ok?”
“Vince.”
“I gotta go.” Phoebe used a spell to go back to the normal world.

“Ahhhhhhhhhhh!” Yelled Stephanie all the way to the Undertakers.
“What’s wrong?” Asked Sara once inside.
“A Train, Big Show!” Sara nodded at her husband and as Sara took Stephanie upstairs Undertaker went to look for the goons.

“What do you mean?” Asked Piper.
“I mean I’m going after a witch hunter and I need your help to get her.”
“We’re not witches.” Said Paige.
“Like hell you aren’t.” Said Jackman giving them a file. They looked inside.
“It’s about them.” Said Leo.
“Right and that’s just a copy if I don’t get their help going after the witch hunter they will be exposed.” Said Jackman.
“How do we know they will be destroyed if we help?” Asked Piper.
“I give you my word.” Said Jackman.
“We need to talk about it.” Said Leo as he took the two girls in the kitchen.

“You better pray for mercy boys.” Said Undertaker taking apart A Train.
“Vince told us to do it.” Said Big Show. Undertaker left them alone and went looking for Vince.

Phoebe came into the kitchen. They caught her up.
“We need to help him.” Said Phoebe.
“What about Cole?” Asked Leo.
“He’ll wait for now.” Said Phoebe. They went back into the diningroom.
“Well?” Asked Jackman.
“We’ll help who is the witch hunter?” Asked Piper.
“Lillian Garcia just bring her to me and I’ll do the rest.” Said Jackman.
“Deal.” Said Paige. They went to do what they had to do. Leo wasn’t happy he went to find out what he had to find out.

“You better pray for someone to save your soul Vince.” Undertaker had Vince up by the collar.
“That’s the old Undertaker I want, we all want.”
“I want your boys in the square tomorrow night, if I win, everyone leaves Stephanie alone.”
“I win, Stephanie gives up her rights to the realms and you come back to me as evil dark Undertaker.” Undertaker didn’t like it but agreed and left.

They got Lillian Garcia and brought her to Jackman.
“What are you doing with me?” Asked Lillian.
“You’re bad we need a life.” Said Paige quickly explaining.
“Files.” Said Piper handing out her hand.
“Here.” He handed the files over to Piper. Undertaker came in.
“What are you doing?” Asked Undertaker.
“Bye.” Said Jackman. A puff of smoke and Jackman and Lillian were gone.
“Getting rid of a witch hunter.” Said Piper cleaning the air of the smoke.
“She was a wiccan.” Said Undertaker.
“Oh no.” Said Paige.
“Now what?” Asked Phoebe.
“I’ll take care of this.” Said Undertaker leaving.

He got to Vince’s.
“Let me go!” Yelled Lillian.
“Ok Vince give me my money.” Said Jackman.
“Let her go McMahon.” Said Undertaker.
“Gladly do what I say Undertaker.” Said Vince.
“What?” Asked Undertaker.
“I let Lillian go and you harm my daughter.”
“No.”
“Ok Jackman hurt Lillian.”
“No wait!” Yelled Lillian.
“Now!” Yelled Undertaker. Leo orbed in and got Lillian and Undertaker out of there.
“That wasn’t a witch hunter?” Asked Jackman.
“A Train! Big Show handle this man!” Yelled Vince. Jackman got handled and left the realms.

“Thank you Undertaker.” Said Lillian at Halliwell Haven.
“Why did he have Jackman make a deal with us to get a wiccan?” Asked Piper confused.
“He wants me to turn dark and evil.” Said Undertaker.
“Are you?” Asked Leo.
“I don’t know.” Said Undertaker leaving.

He fought Big Show and A Train and when he was about to lose the tall dude with the accent saved him and Undertaker won. Undertaker knew that he would find out what the man wanted soon enough.

So what did the man want?

TBC....

Chapter 54
Ah No

Vince went to Undertaker.
“Are you going to join me?”
“Ah no.” Said Undertaker.
“I promise Undertaker if you don’t Stephanie and all you hold dear will be hurt.” Said Vince.
“Then I’ll be there to make sure they don’t.” Undertaker left Vince’s eye shot he couldn’t stand very much of that man right now.

Meanwhile the wiccan area was threatened by one man. Sean O’Haire a punisher. He set his eyes on Rikishi a wiccan. He beat the crap out of him in Stamford Square when Rikishi was coming home from the slaves.
“What the hell did you do that for?” Asked Rikishi.
“I wanted to finish something. 20 years ago you and your fellow wiccan Snuka decided to be funny.”
“What?”
“You treated a friend like crap.”
“Who?” Rowdy Roddy came out.
“Who do you think?” Asked Rowdy.
“I didn’t treat you like crap, you neglected to tell O’Haire that you viciously attacked my family Snuka and you wanted me to stand by and let you do it without sticking up for him.” Said Rikishi.
“Is that true?” Asked O’Haire.
“Maybe just a little true.” Said Rowdy Roddy. Sean O’Haire growled and left.

Meanwhile Undertaker was training Nathan at a nearby Gym. They used Shannon Moore for the training. Undertaker and Nathan took a break which gave Shannon Moore a break to which he was grateful for.
“Thanks Undertaker for helping me.”
“You need to decide what you want to be.” Said Undertaker.
“I was born into slavery and I don’t want to be like that anymore.”
“What did you want?”
“To be a punisher and a protector just like you.”
“I think you might be able to do that.”
“Thank you for giving me the chance.”
“I wouldn’t be helping if you couldn’t do it.”
“I know.” Nathan and Shannon went back to work. O’Haire showed up and kneeled in front of the Undertaker.
“Nathan block him!” He looked at O’Haire. “What do you want?” O’Haire stood up.
“To ask forgiveness.”
“What for?”
“I hurt a guy without just cause.”
“Go to the slave area and wait for me.”
“Yes Undertaker.” Sean O’Haire did what Undertaker wanted he knew he did wrong.

After the training Shannon Moore had enough he went to find Matt Hardy.
“Word is you’re bad.”
“Yup.”
“I want to partner up with you.” Said Shannon.
“Why?”
“I’m tired of the Undertaker using me as a punching bag for a very tall retarted moron.”
“You win.” Lita came up to them.
“What does this mean for us?” She asked.
“I don’t know, Undertaker injured you a while back I thought you be in my corner.” Said Matt.
“That was when he was bad.”
“If you’re not in my corner Lita stay out of my way.” Lita walked away from Matt.

Two wiccans Billy Kidman and Torrie Wilson were getting serious for awhile.
“Torrie will you marry me?” Asked Billy showing her the ring.
“We need permission first.”
“Vince.” Said Billy knowing full well that Vince and Undertaker had control of the realms.

“No.” Said Vince.
“What?” Asked Billy. Torrie began to cry.
“I said no.” Billy and Torrie went to where Undertaker was.

“Ok Nathan we’re done for today.” Said Undertaker.
“Ok thanks Undertaker.” Nathan left and Billy and Torrie came in. Torrie was still crying.
“What the hell is wrong with her?” Asked Undertaker.
“Vince said we couldn’t get married.” Said Billy.
“Waaaaaaaaaaaa!” Cried Torrie.
“Man I hate it when women do that. Get married next week.”
“I can’t wait that long.” Said Torrie sobbing.
“Do it right now for all I care.” Torrie and Billy were happy they decided to get married now that they had the Undertaker’s permission.

When Vince got the news that Undertaker ok’d the wedding he was outraged.
“What?” Asked Vince.
“You know Undertaker will go against you.” Said HHH.
“Undertaker has to fight the FBI.” Said Vince.
“Black witches?” Asked HHH.
“Right and tell them to use everything they got.” Vince slammed his hand on the table.

Undertaker had the magic part covered he paid Kane to protect him even though he didn’t like it.
“I think you should turn evil again.” Said Kane.
“No.” Said Undertaker.

Undertaker fought FBI by himself and when they thought they were going to win Undertaker tombstoned Chuck Palumbo and gave the last ride to Nunzio.

“What?” Asked Vince.
“He won.” Said HHH.
“He has to fight one of his own. Rey Mysterio.”

Undertaker fought Rey, Rey and Rey ran circles around the Undertaker which confused the deadman. Undertaker won then he got word to go find Nathan. Two cops found Nathan.

“We need to take him in for questioning.” Said One.
“Why cause he talks different?” Asked Undertaker pissed off.
“No cause money went missing.” Said the other cop.
“No he didn’t steal it.” Said Undertaker.
“It’s ok Undertaker I’ll go with them.” Said Nathan.
“I’m sorry sir it’s just for questioning.” Said the first one. Undertaker reluctantly let Nathan go with him.

Meanwhile Molly a black witch found the newest black witch Victoria.
“Stacy is a blonde and beautiful.” Said Molly.
“A blonde huh?” Asked Victoria.

Victoria found Stacy.
“I have a present for you.” Said Victoria.
“What?” Asked Stacy. Victoria licked Stacy’s cheek.
“See ya around.” Victoria and Molly laid claimed on Stacy and Trish cause they hated blonde, beautiful women.

That night Lita went to the Undertaker’s house.
“What do you want little girl?”
“Matt and Shannon Moore joined on the forces of evil.”
“Why?”
“Matt misses Jeff and the best I can figure Shannon didn’t appreciate you using him as a punching bag.” Undertaker grabbed Lita under the chin.
“And you?”
“I’m on the side of good.” She left.

The next day Nathan was cleared of any wrong doings and while Undertaker was getting coffee at the training house. FBI found him.
“We want a word with you.” Said Nunzio.
“What?” Asked Undertaker. They all sat down at a table. The FBI sitting across from the large man.
“It’s about your boy.” Said Nunzio.
“What about him?” Asked Undertaker.
“He better stay out of my way.” Said Nunzio. Undertaker stood up and Nathan Jones came in.
“Is there a problem mate?”
“Is there a problem?” Asked Undertaker to FBI.
“No, no problem.” Said Nunzio as he and the other two left.

Vince got word that Undertaker wasn’t going to back down. Soon after Vince had Nathan banned from the realms. Then Vince sent for Heyman and Brock.
“What do you need?” Asked Heyman.
“I want Brock here to send a message to Undertaker through Sara.” Said Vince.
“It will be my pleasure.” Said Brock. They laughed evilly.

Now what did Vince had in mind?

TBC....

Chapter 55
I heard the mermaids singing

Dawn Marie decided to invest into black sorcery. She knew she would become more powerful with the beauty and power of a charmed one. But to do that she would have to trap the charmed ones. And that was to go after another thing of beauty a mermaid. Anastacia’s time was up she had to pay her dues to Dawn Marie.
“I know he loves me.”
“Who loves you?” Asked Dawn Marie.
“Jeff Hardy I know he loves me.”
“Did he tell you that?”
“No.”
“He needs to tell you that or your beauty and soul will be mine.”
“Please isn’t there anyway to save me?”
“No.” Dawn Marie knew that Anastacia would go to the charmed ones for help. Anastacia left to go and get help since she can’t get Jeff to tell her he loves her.

Phoebe came out of work at the news paper and got into her car.
“Ahhh.” She screamed when she saw a face plastered to the windshield.
“I’m sorry I recognized your face on the billboards all over town.” Said Anastacia.
“A fan how nice.” Said Phoebe. It started to rain.
“You don’t understand.” Anastacia turned into a mermaid. Phoebe got out of the car.
“What happened to you?” Asked Phoebe.
“I’m a mermaid help me please.” Said Anastacia.

Phoebe got Anastacia the mermaid home safely and she was in the Halliwell livingroom trying to get her tail blow dried.
“I don’t understand why you need my help?” Asked Phoebe.
“I need you to get Jeff Hardy from the TNA realm and tell him to tell me that he loves me without telling him I’m a mermaid.” Said Anastacia.
“And how do you propose we do that?” Asked Paige.
“I don’t know that’s why I came to you, if he doesn’t tell me he’s loved me this black witch Dawn Marie will have my soul and beauty.” Said Anastacia.
“Which leaves you where?” Asked Piper.
“Death.” Said Phoebe.
“Yes.” Said Anastacia.
“Dawn Marie? I’m going to see what the Undertaker knows.” Said Leo.
“No wait I don’t want to deal with no sea hag, just bring him here and he can deal with it.” Said Piper.
“You can’t be scared.”
“Tell that to the baby I’m carrying now Leo.”
“Ok baby it’s your daddy, mommy can’t be afraid forever.” Said Leo.
“Look Undertaker has to do a dark check anyways.” Said Phoebe.
“My baby is fine.” Said Piper.
“We don’t know that.” Said Paige.
“Yeah I had the devil son in me and who knows what you might have.” Said Phoebe.
“I’m married to an angel.” Said Piper.
“Doesn’t matter who knows what did what out there we got to make sure.” Said Paige.
“And at the same time get rid of your fear.” Said Leo.
“I don’t know my fear, I just don’t want to do it right now.” Said Piper referring to getting rid of evil and black magic.
“I’ll go get him.” Said Leo.

“Who is this Undertaker?” Asked Anastacia. They were about to speak but Undertaker and Leo orbed in.
“What?” Asked Undertaker hands on his hips.
“Watch.” Said Phoebe pouring water on Anastacia who turned into a mermaid.
“Ok then I’m leaving.” Said Undertaker. Leo stopped him.
“What do you know about Dawn Marie?” Asked Leo.
“I used to train her to fight with my wife and then she went to the side of evil.” Said Undertaker.
“She wants my soul, beauty and body.”
“Who wouldn’t?” Asked Undertaker shaking his head.
“Hey keep your mind out of the gutter mister.” Said Piper.
“What do you want from me?” Asked a very confused Undertaker.
“Besides to tell if Piper’s baby is evil, help Anastacia.” Said Phoebe.
“That’s your area.” Said Undertaker.
“We need you to confront Dawn Marie so we can find Jeff Hardy whoever he is.” Said Paige.
“No what you need to do is half of you keep Dawn Marie busy the other half get Jeff before your time is up.” Said Undertaker.
“No way then we’ll end up in a battle with a black witch.” Said Piper. Undertaker went over to Piper and put his hand on her forehead.
“You have a fear.”
“No kidding sherlock I’m scared of black witches.” Said Piper.
“No you aren’t you used to fight them all the time.” Said Leo.
“That’s beside the point.” Said Piper.
“Do as I say then call me when you want to check.” Said Undertaker leaving.
“Ok Piper and I will get Jeff Hardy and you two go and keep Dawn Marie busy.” Said Leo.
“What about me?” Asked Anastacia.
“Stay here, I’m going to do a spell and maybe switch things around.” Said Paige.
“Right I’ll go and see Dawn Marie alone.” Said Phoebe. They went to do what they have to do.

Phoebe found Dawn Marie in the Spanish caverns like Anastacia said.
“Hey.”
“Who are you?”
“Who do you think?”
“A Charmed one.” Said Dawn Marie.

Leo and Piper found Jeff Hardy in the TNA realm.
“You need to come with us.” Said Leo.
“Who are you?” Asked Jeff.
“For Anastacia.” Said Piper. They dragged Jeff Hardy away.

“Ok I think I found something.” Said Paige coming back into the livingroom.
“Did you?” Asked Anastacia. Leo, Piper and Jeff orbed in.
“I been around to know you’re a protector what the hell is going on?” Asked Jeff.
“Jeff?”
“Anastacia.”
“Ok tell her you love her.” Said Piper.
“I can’t do that I have no idea what I feel yet.” Said Jeff.
“I know you love me please tell me.” Said Anastacia.
“How do you know?” Asked Jeff. They threw water on Anastacia and she turned into a mermaid again.
“That’s how.” Said Paige.
“This is sick.” Jeff left.
“Jeffffffffffffff!” Yelled Anastacia.
“Ok plan b the spell.” Said Paige.
“Damn we have to deal with a black witch.” Said Piper. They went to the caverns where Phoebe was.

“You’re a toad.” Said Phoebe. Dawn Marie laughed.
“You been calling me names for a half hour what do you want?” Asked Dawn Marie.
“She wants this!” Yelled Paige. She and Piper said the spell. The only thing is Phoebe turned into a mermaid, Anastacia turned human and Piper cowled away.
“Bitch!” Yelled Dawn Marie using magic but it aimed in Piper’s direction. Piper was thrust under the water.

Under the water Piper was close to dying. Patty’s spirit showed up.
“Piper.”
“Mama?”
“Piper I know why you are afraid.”
“Mama why?”
“Because you are afraid you will leave your baby like I had to leave you.”
“Yes.” Said Piper.
“Piper you’re not me and you have a destiny it’s a different time. Don’t be afraid and don’t let it stop you from being a charmed one.”
“Ok mommy.” Patty held out her hand.
“Take my hand.” Patty helped Piper to the surface and disappeared. They got Piper out.
“Mama?”
“Patty? Where?” Asked Leo.
“Ok turn Phoebe back into a human.” Said Paige.
“Would love to if she gives up her beauty and soul to me.” Said Dawn Marie.
“We need a spell.” Said Leo.
“No it reversed it onto Phoebe this time she’s the one that has to do it I might do more damage.” Said Paige.
“That’s right.” Said Dawn Marie.
“We’re not giving up our sister we’ll find another way.” Said Piper.
“Easy be careful.” Warned Leo to Piper.
“I’m not afraid anymore.”
“You will be. When you lose a sister.” Laughed Dawn Marie sinister like.
“Piper I don’t want to be human I want to be a mermaid.” Said Phoebe swimming away.
“Now what?” Asked Paige. Dawn Marie laughed again.

Yeah exactly now what?

*Just like this episode it was two parts so I’ll put this chapter in two parts. Part two tomorrow.

TBC...

Chapter 56
Phoebe Confronts Cole

The others walked into Halliwell Haven.
“We need Phoebe back.” Said Piper.
“Only one problem she wants to escape from Cole.” Said Paige.
“What do you mean?” Asked Leo.
“Well he’s the cause of her pain, he’s in love with her and she’s in love with him.” Said Paige.
“But she wants to run.” Noted Leo.
“Right.” Said Paige.
“So what do we do?” Asked Piper.
“Ask the Undertaker.” Said Leo orbing out.

Meanwhile Sara was home alone. The phone rang.
“Hello?”
“Hello Sara it’s Brock.”
“What do you want?”
“You, I want you Sara.” Sara hung up the phone and Leo orbed in.
“Don’t scare me.” Said Sara.
“Sorry, is he home?”
“No he’s in the slave realm.” Trish came in.
“He doesn’t want to go down there.” She said.
“Ok thanks.” Said Leo orbing to the slaves.


“Ok lights out.” Said a guard outside RVD’s door.
“Ah I’m having a meeting.” Said Rob. The door opened and the guard came in.
“Having a meeting with who?” Then he looked and kneeled.
“With him.” Said RVD pointing.
“Sorry Mr Undertaker.”
“Get out.” Said Undertaker and the guard listened.
“And you want me to help Kane?”
“I think you’re the only one that can.” Said Undertaker.
“No offence to you deadman but I think I’m the least person to bring him back to reality.”
“Kane needs friends.”
“Kane needs his brother.”
“Kane always had his brother, right now Kane doesn’t choose his brother.” Leo orbed in.
“Man I’m going to get whipped.” Said RVD.
“I was looking for you.” Said Leo looking at Undertaker.
“You found me.” Said Undertaker.
“Now what?” Asked Leo.
“I’ll come for you tomorrow, you will have freedom for a week to do what you have to do.”
“I’ll try.” Said RVD. Leo orbed Undertaker home.

“Sara are you ok?”
“Ah yeah I’m ok.” She said. Undertaker looked at his wife.
“You’re lying.”
“Hello excuse me.” Said Leo.
“What?” Asked Undertaker.
“Phoebe is a mermaid.”
“I know that.”
“She doesn’t want to change back.”
“You want her back it has to be up to him.”
“You mean Cole?”
“Yeah.”
“What does he have to do?”
“Explain how he feels.”
“What if she won’t take him back?”
“That is up to her.” Leo nodded and left. “What’s wrong?”
“Brock Lesnar called.”
“For me?”
“No for me.” Undertaker decided to take his wife anywhere he went.

Leo found Cole in his old apartment.
“You need to go to Phoebe.”
“Why the hell should I?”
“Because she’s a mermaid.”
“What does that have to do with me?”
“You have to turn her back.”
“Fine.” Said Cole. Leo and Cole went to find Phoebe.

“You’re trying to change me? Don’t make me laugh.” Said Kane.
“Kane you need a friend.”
“I need you to leave me alone.”
“Kane listen to me!”
“No!” Kane scared RVD out of there. HHH came along.
“Just keep doing what you are doing.” Said HHH.
“What do you mean?”
“You do what Vince wants and you’ll never have to hear about Katie Vick again, she’ll be gone from history.”
“I do what I want.” Kane walked away.

Phoebe swam to the surface.
“What do you want?” Asked Phoebe.
“I’ll leave you two alone.” Said Leo. He orbed out.
“Phoebe I’m in love with you.” Said Cole.
“Why did you hurt me and become evil?”
“Why did you only banish me?”
“Because the spell wouldn’t kill you, now me?”
“I don’t know.”
“You don’t know?”
“I’m in love with you and I’m sorry I hurt you, I’m going to ask the Undertaker to banish me forever.”
“You may be in love with me but it doesn’t change a thing.” Phoebe turned into human. Naked human. Cole put his coat over her.
“I understand.” He shimmered out and she went back home.

RVD found the Undertaker.
“I want permission to challenge your brother.”
“If you wish.”
“Thank you.” RVD left.

Meanwhile Shelly the seer was in the bowels of hell.
“I will own your baby Phoebe.” Shelly the seer began to make plans of stealing Phoebe’s baby.

Undertaker had Brock to deal with, Kane had the realm to deal with, and the charmed ones soon had to save Phoebe from Shelly, her baby and herself.

TBC....
Chapter 57
Destiny

Phoebe can’t having dreams that Shelly the Seer was going to steal her baby.

Vince told Undertaker he had to fight Matt Hardy. Lita found Undertaker.
“Take it easy on him?”
“Why should I? I’m trying to fight evil.”
“I still love him.”
“You shouldn’t have left him.”
“I had to he’s evil.” She left. Undertaker and Sara went to the fight.

Shelly the seer went to see Vince.
“I need you to keep the Undertaker busy.”
“Why?”
“I’m going to steal Phoebe’s baby.”
“How?”
“With my knowledge of the black arts.”
“I think I have something to keep him busy if you hurry.”
“I’ll hurry.” Shelly the seer left to go do her worst.

*Note Sara’s not pregnant in this story cause it’s their personal life, she’s just regular.

Undertaker and Sara were waiting for Matt Hardy to show up in Stamford Square. They were in the waiting area.
“You ok?” Asked Undertaker.
“I’m fine, I’ll wait and then we’ll go out for supper or something.” Said Sara.
“Sounds good.”
“Just be careful.”
“When I leave lock the door.”
“I will.” Undertaker left.

Shelly the seer had Phoebe caged.
“What do you want with me?”
“I’m going to be the ruler of all evil now that Cole is out for good.”
“Then be it leave me alone.”
“I can’t do that yet.” Paige and Piper were caged in the same cage.
“Sis what’s going on?” Asked Piper.
“You’re guess is as good as mine.” Said Phoebe.
“Now that you have us what do you plan to do?” Asked Paige.
“Watch.” Said Shelly the Seer. She did a spell to steal Phoebe’s baby.
“My baby.” Said Phoebe clutching her stomach. Shelly turned around to the other bad guys for the ceremony.
“I have evil, I stole evil, it’s mine, do the ceremony.” As they were doing the ceremony the charmed ones were talking.
“Undertaker gave me a spell to hang onto.” Said Paige.
“When?” Asked Piper.
“When I knew Cole was evil.” Cole came in.
“Say it!” They didn’t know he was watching. As the charmed ones said the spell Cole took care of the bad guys. Shelly the seer, the evil baby and the rest of the bad guys were gone. Phoebe was in turmoil.

“Hello Sara!” Brock and Heyman barged their way in. “We were looking for you.” Continued Heyman.
“What do you want?” Asked Sara. Brock walked Sara so she was trapped to the wall. He touched her stomach.
“I want you.” She tried to look away.

As Leo took the charmed ones back Cole went to where Undertaker was.
“Your wife is in trouble go!” Undertaker went back to the waiting room.
“What do you want?” Asked Matt. Cole injured Matt Hardy using black magic.
“Undertaker won.” Cole shimmered out.

Undertaker and Brock fought. Brock won and then left with Heyman. Sara went over to the passed out Undertaker.
“Please wake up, honey.” Leo came in.
“Move out of the way.” He said. Leo fixed Undertaker up and all three of them went to Halliwell Haven.

By this time Phoebe was screaming.
“Get out! My baby is dead get out!” Piper and Paige and Cole left Phoebe’s room.
“I can’t do anything she won’t let me.” Said Cole. Leo and Undertaker showed up.
“I can.” Said Undertaker. He went into the room and Phoebe stopped screaming. Cole shimmered out he knew he couldn’t help Phoebe.
“Got any tea?” Asked Sara.
“Yeah I’ll put some on.” Said Paige going to the kitchen. The others went downstairs to wait for Undertaker and Phoebe to come down.

Eventually Undertaker came down.
“What happened?” Asked Piper.
“She’s sleeping.” Said Undertaker.
“So is your wife.” Said Leo. Undertaker picked up his wife lovingly in his arms. He was going to get revenge on Brock, Heyman and Vince. Leo orbed them home.

TBC....

Chapter 58
Winners and Losers

*Bill Gates is a fucking faggot, I originally wrote this chapter this morning his freaking program decides to erase the whole fucking chapter now I don’t know what I wrote so now I have to make it up and it’s going to be shitty cause of his bullshit. The man has gotta be sued by us little people. That fucking little faggot freak.

Leo was called, he assumed it was by someone that he had to protect. He was called to Bischoff Bay, named after Eric Bischoff.
“Who are you?”
“You want me. I’m Diane the siren.” She kissed him and he was under her spell.

RVD made the challenge to Kane and Kane accepted. The fight didn’t happen though cause RVD was kidnapped. He was in boiler room hell tied up and gagged.
“Hello Rob.” Said Kane.
“Hohosthyrohtohs.” Muffled RVD.
“They want me to be nice but I’m not nice.” Noted Kane. RVD tried to get out of Kane’s clutches but to no avail.

Cole went to the Undertaker.
“Kane sent word that he kidnapped someone.” Said Cole.
“RVD, I know.” Said Undertaker.
“Let me help.”
“Why?”
“I want to show Phoebe I can be a nice guy.”
“Thought she didn’t want you?”
“She doesn’t but I’m going to keep trying.”
“Ok.” Said Undertaker and Cole went to find Kane and RVD.

Leo walked into his bedroom and started packing.
“Honey what are you doing?”
“I’m leaving you.”
“What?” Asked Piper. Piper watched her husband leave the house with his suitcase and she went to the kitchen.
“Hey.” Said Paige.
“Leo just left me.”
“Honey that can’t be true he loves you.” Said Phoebe. Piper sat down and cried.

“Hey look over there!” Said Cole as he threw a fire ball behind Kane. Kane looked and Cole got RVD down and to the Undertaker still tied up and gagged.

As Undertaker brought RVD back to the slave section Cole went to Halliwell Haven.
“Leo left me I can’t believe he left me.” Said Piper.
“Cole what are you doing here?” Asked Paige.
“I.” Cole didn’t get a chance to finish.
“I don’t want you here Cole.” Said Phoebe. Cole shimmered out.

“See there you want me.” Said Diane the siren.
“I want you.” Said Leo in a monotone. Diane the siren kissed her.

Cole went to Undertaker.
“I need you to use black magic to tell me where Leo is.” Said Cole.
“Why don’t you?”
“I can’t use it I need Phoebe to believe I’m good.”
“Go to Kane.”
“I can’t do that either.”
“Right.” Undertaker used black knowledge to find out where Leo was.

“You’ll like this Vince.” Said Sable.
“What?”
“Undertaker is using black magic that is grounds for arrest.”
“Angle, Big Show go arrest the Undertaker.” Said Vince.
“You gotta be kidding.” Noted Angle.
“No.” Angle and Big Show went to arrest the Undertaker.

Cole found Leo.
“He’s coming with me.” Said Cole.
“Who are you?” Asked Diane the siren.
“Someone you don’t want to deal with.” Cole used black magic to get rid of her and bring Leo back home.

“Undertaker you’re under arrest.” Said Kurt Angle.
“Whatever you say cue ball.” Said Undertaker. Kurt Angle and Big Show brought Undertaker to Vince.

“Thank you.” Said Piper.
“What happened.” Leo didn’t know what was going on. Piper brought Leo upstairs.
“Did you use black magic?” Asked Phoebe.
“I think I’ll go to the kitchen.” Said Paige going to the kitchen.
“Well?”
“Yes.” Said Cole.
“Goodbye Cole.”

Kane went to the McMahon house.
“Hello Linda.”
“Kane.”
“Linda.”
“Is there something I can do for you Kane?” Kane tombstoned Linda.

Cole went to Vince.
“Let him go and we’ll talk.” Said Cole.
“You have no authority.” Said Vince.
“I think I do.” Said Cole.
“Undertaker get lost.” Said Vince.
“You and your ho will get it Vince.” Said Undertaker. Undertaker left.
“Well?” Asked Vince.
“I’m evil and on your side.” Said Cole. The two men laughed evilly together.

“Kane as long as there is a breath in my body you will suffer for what you did to my mother.”
“As long as I breathe Shane the whole world suffers.” Said Kane. The fight was on.

Undertaker got a note to be close to Stamford Square. Heyman, Brock and a girl was in the square.
“This is Tracy she has something to say.” Said Heyman..
“Mark I am pregnant with your baby.” Said Tracy. Nobody used Undertaker’s real name in the realms it was disrespectful and forbidden. Undertaker came along on his hog and then went to the square. Heyman and Brock left.
“Lady I don’t know you.”
“Sara you’re husband and me had sex not that long ago.” Said Tracy. Undertaker left he knew he couldn’t do anything at that moment.

Undertaker tried to phone his wife.
“No Sara I don’t know who it is, it’s a sick game.”
“You cheated on me.”
“No I didn’t.” She hung up on him. “Sara? Damn!” He threw the phone.

Kane had Shane to deal with and Undertaker had his own problems would they be fixed though?

*Dedicated to Diane “the door” LaPorte who made my life hell in highschool and thought she was all that.

TBC...

Chapter 59
Bod Problems

Kane and Shane kept going at it. Sara wouldn’t let Undertaker back in the house. He stayed at his brother’s.

Undertaker sat by Calaway lake and thought. Kane came along. They looked at eachother.
“How’s your week going?” Asked Kane.
“You gotta be kidding?” Undertaker retorted. Kane shook his head.

When they got back to Kane’s shortly after Stephanie McMahon paid a visit.
“I want to help Undertaker.”
“I’m going upstairs.” Said Kane not interested in the goody, goody Stephanie.
“What do you mean?” Asked Undertaker.
“You helped me I want to help you with this slut problem.”
“How?”
“Never mind how, tomorrow night be close by Stamford Square. I’ll do a video feed for the realms to see.”
“And that is that supposed to do Steph?”
“You’ll see.” Stephanie held Undertaker’s hand. “Deadman I trusted you with my life now I’m asking you to trust me.” He nodded.

Stephanie then left and went to find Cole in his apartment.
“I need help.”
“No way, I can’t use the dark.”
“That’s not what I’m asking.”
“What do you want?” Asked a puzzled Cole.
“I want you to put the squeeze on that slut that claims to be pregnant with deadman’s baby.”
“Maybe she is.”
“That’s not fair you know very well since he found Sara he’s been a changed man.”
“Ok where do you want me?”
“Stamford Square with me tomorrow night.”
“I’ll be there.”

“I heard Stephanie was trying to help the Undertaker.” Said Brock.
“Is that so?” Asked Vince.
“I think Brock should go after Stephanie.” Said Heyman.
“I agree.” Said Vince.
“Consider it done they don’t call me the next big thing for nothing.”
“Hey nothing stupid.” Said Vince.
“Don’t worry.” Said Brock.

The next night in the square Cole had Tracy around the neck, didn’t squeeze or cut off air but just held her still.
“What?” Asked Tracy.
“Tell me who put you up to it.” Said Cole.
“What?” Asked Tracy.
“The lies.” Said Cole giving her the look of death.
“It was Vince.” Said Tracy.
“You mean Paul Heyman and Brock Lesnar?” Asked Stephanie.
“Vince funded for me to say I was pregnant with deadman’s baby.”
“Why?” Asked Cole.
“I don’t know. I didn’t want him.” Cole let go when Undertaker walked to the square.
“You’re a liar!” He said and pointed at the same time. He then did the unthinkable. He used black magic to get rid of Tracy. Then he rolled his eyes back. “Grrrrrrrrr.” He walked away.
“What does that mean?” Asked Cole gulping.
“I haven’t seen him do that since he was the lord of darkness.” Said a worried Stephanie.

The whole realms saw what happened on tv.
“Damn you Stephanie!” Yelled Vince enough for the realm and Canad Realm to hear. Brock then decided not to piss off the Undertaker.

The next night Undertaker called for a feed in the square again. Meanwhile Kane just beat up Shane heavily.
“You give up yet?” Asked Kane.
“Never!” Stated Shane spitting up blood.

“I want to say something.” Said Undertaker. Big Show came out.
“You know deadman you’re a has been.”
“I rather be a has been then a giant that never was.” Stated Undertaker. Big Show was about ready to pound the Undertaker and Undertaker used black magic on him. Big Show backed off. Stephanie knew if Undertaker went back he couldn’t go back normal.

Back at Halliwell Haven.
“I don’t understand how he can use his powers we dormented them.” Said Phoebe.
“Unless they didn’t take.” Said Piper.
“Or unless something or someone interfered.” Said Paige.

“No Big Show get lost I’m warning you.” Said Stephanie.
“But Steph!”
“Never mind just go.” Stephanie wanted to give a warning to Big Show before it was too late for Undertaker to come back to who he was. That’s when Brock came out. Big Show left.
“I had to get to you man, I apologize, it was Vince’s idea for me to go after your wife.” Said Brock.
“I know.” Said Undertaker in a low growl. Vince came out.
“Yes it was my idea. Stephanie you are going to fight me.” Said Vince.
“No daddy.”
“You fight me or I’ll make your life a living hell.” Brock grabbed Stephanie around the throat. Undertaker beat the crap out of him for it. Stephanie ran to Undertaker’s side. Undertaker put his arm around her.
“And the Undertaker’s.” Said Vince.
“You win daddy I’ll fight you but I win you leave him alone.” Said Stephanie.
“You’re not doing it.” Said Undertaker.
“Yes I am.” Vince gave her a piece of paper.
“Sign.”
“I said no.” Said Undertaker. Stephanie grabbed the pen and signed.
“Sorry Undertaker it’s something I have to do.” Said Stephanie. Undertaker knew Vince was more dangerous then anything that Undertaker could be. Big Show attacked the Undertaker, enough so Undertaker was out of commission while Vince handled his daughter.

The charmed ones and Leo went to Undertaker.
“We want to help.” Said Leo.
“What do you mean?” Asked Undertaker.
“How much trouble is Stephanie in if she fights her father?” Asked Phoebe.
“Vince is evil more evil then I could ever be.”
“We need to get her out of it.” Said Paige.
“Once Stephanie makes up her mind there is no changing it.” Said Undertaker.
“At least we can do is stop it before it gets too bad.” Said Leo.
“How?” Asked Undertaker.
“A spell.” Said Piper. Phoebe set to work on a spell.

The fight was set and Vince was beating his daughter to a bloody pulp. The charmed ones did a spell but it turned them into something they would never thought would be. Modern day Robin Hood’s. They were dressed in the clothes that Robin Hood and his merry men would wear.
“What the hell happened?” Asked Piper.
“I don’t know.” Said Phoebe.
“Let’s go with it.” Said Paige. They went in and went after Vince. Vince stopped trying to go after Stephanie.
“This is too funny!” Vince couldn’t stop laughing.
“Oh yeah laugh at this!” Piper used her power on him and his ass went into the air.
“Ow! Man it’s funny Robin Hood’s I guess Stephanie is maid Marion.” Vince was rolling in the square laughing. Undertaker came in and picked up a fallen Stephanie in his arms. He brought her back to his place leaving the charmed ones as Robin Hood girls with Vince.

“I’m sorry Undertaker.” Said Stephanie.
“You need sleep.” Said Undertaker.
“I can’t sleep all I see is my dad.”
“Do something.” Said Sara.
“Are you sure?” Asked Undertaker.
“Yes.” Undertaker put his hand over Stephanie’s eyes and used a dark spell. After Stephanie was asleep Undertaker and Sara went to the livingroom downstairs. Where Trish just shut the door.
“A message was delivered to you Undertaker.” Undertaker took it from her and read it.
“What?” Asked Sara.
“Tomorrow a fight with A Train and Big Show together.”
“Wow.” Said Sara. Undertaker knew he had to win this one, he had to send a message to Vince.

Would Vince make it easy for the Undertaker to win cleanly?

TBC....

Chapter 60
Hell

Shane sent word for Kane to meet him at Yoshiro restaurant on the outskirts of the realms.
“Nice to see you Shane.”
“Cut with the crap Kane.”
“Ok what do you want Shane?”
“What will it take for you to leave people alone and go back to the side of good.”
“A fight next week.”
“Consider it done.” Said Shane getting up and leaving without ordering.

Before Undertaker’s fight with Big Show and A Train he banged up some of Vince’s security guards outside the watcher box in the square.
“What the hell is that?” Asked Vince. With one magical movement the door came off the hinges and fell onto the floor. There stood the Undertaker, dressed like a biker Undertaker as usual but looking more evil then ever. He came into the room.
“Get out of here.” Said Sable.
“Shut up!” Yelled Undertaker back to Sable.
“What do you want Undertaker?” Asked Vince as Sable hung onto his arm.
“The promise that if I lose tonight by interference that you and your ho will never rest in peace.”
“Hey!” Yelled Sable.
“Shut up!” Undertaker was not in a forgiving mood with Sable’s sluttyish life. Undertaker left.

Meanwhile at Halliwell Haven Piper was running around like mad.
“It’s not good for the baby stay still will ya?” Asked Leo.
“I can’t dad will be here any second.” Said Piper.
“Wonder what the surprise is?” Asked Phoebe.
“Maybe diamonds?” Guessed Paige.
“All I want is dad.” Said Piper.
“Me to.” Said Phoebe.
“I was kidding.” Said Paige. The doorbell rang and they answered it.
“Hey girls.” Said Victor.
“Hi dad whose this?” Asked Piper kissing her father.
“This is Liza, I’m going to marry her.” Said Victor.
“What?” Asked all three girls.
“Hi girls nice to meet you.” Said Liza hugging them all. All three girls couldn’t believe it.

Undertaker fought Big Show and A Train and won without Vince interfering.
“Guess I better congratulate the Undertaker.” Said Vince.
“Don’t go.” Said Sable purring.
“Don’t worry.” Said Vince.

Linda was talking to Shane.
“Shane for the love of god don’t fight Kane.”
“I have to mother.” Said Shane.
“He’s dangerous.”
“Well so am I.” Shane left the house.

“How did you meet?” Asked Piper.
“At a restaurant.” Said Victor.
“Yeah we accidentally bumped into eachother, I love honey bunch.” Said Liza.
“Honey bunch?” Asked Paige as she and the other two girls almost gagged.
“His nickname.” Said Liza.

“Congratulations Undertaker you won, what do you want? Sable for one night?” Asked Vince.
“A fight.”
“Ok I’ll set up another fight with these two men next week.”
“No with you.” Vince looked at Undertaker dumbfounded.

Stephanie was having tea with Sara.
“I’m glad he’s back home.”
“I’m glad I found a way to make that slut confess.” Said Stephanie.
“Thank you.” Said Sara.
“No problem.” Said Stephanie.

Vince and Kurt Angle was talking, at a feed for the realms in Vince’s office downtown.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Kurt.
“What do you mean?” Asked Vince.
“How are you going to beat the Undertaker?”
“I have no chance at beating the Undertaker.”
“Then what are you going to do?” Asked a puzzled Kurt.
“I’m going to have his wife raped and make him watch. He’ll be so traumatized he won’t know what hit him.” Said Vince.
“And then you’ll win.” Noted Angle.

Stephanie found Shane.
“You gotta be kidding.” Said Stephanie.
“What?” Asked Shane.
“Fighting Kane?”
“Don’t start I already heard the same lecture from mom.” Said Shane.

“You know Piper if you eat a lemon a day it will make you stay sharp.” Said Liza. Piper couldn’t hide her disgust fast enough. Phoebe came into the room.
“Hey what’s going on?” Asked Phoebe.
“Did you know if I eat a lemon a day it will keep me sharp?” Asked Piper. Then she went upstairs.

Before the fight the following week Vince found Shane.
“It’s funny.” Said Vince.
“What?” Asked Shane.
“You and I have fights with both brothers.” Said Vince.
“What’s funny is the Undertaker will bury you alive.” Said Shane. Vince left the room and ran into Austin.
“Haaaaaaaaaaaaaa.” Austin laughed.
“What?” Asked Vince.
“You’re getting buried.” Vince left Austin he didn’t know what to do.

“It’s time!” Yelled Liza.
“I’m having a baby not playing football.” Said Piper.
“Let’s get her to the hospital.” Said Victor.
“I need Leo.” Said Piper.
“Leo is busy at the moment.” Said Liza.
“What do you mean?” Asked Phoebe.
“He’s busyyyyyyyyyyyy.” Said Liza manically. She then turned around and did a spell on Victor to make him passout.
“Leoooooooooooooo!” Yelled the girls. The door opened and Liza pushed Phoebe and Paige out using magic, then the door locked.

“Now what?” Asked Phoebe. Paige tried to orb back in.
“She blocked it.” Said Paige.
“What do we do?” Asked Phoebe.
“Get the Undertaker.” Said Paige. She couldn’t orb but she and Phoebe drove like mad to get to the Undertaker’s.

They put Shane’s bruised body in the ambulance.
“Take him away boys.” Said Kane. They did.

“Where is he?” Asked Phoebe.
“In a fight what’s wrong?” Asked Sara.
“Piper is going to have the baby stolen.” Said Paige.
“Can I help?” Asked Sara.
“Yeah you can come on.” Said Phoebe. All three of them left.

Undertaker was beating the crap out of Vince.
“This is for you wanting to harm Sara!”
“Stop.” Begged Vince. Undertaker continued on and just as he was about to bury Vince alive there was an explosion and Kane came out to beat the crap out of the Undertaker. They then buried him alive and Kane took the Undertaker’s bandana.

“What do you need me to do?” Asked Sara.
“Pretend you can use magic.” Said Phoebe.
“But I don’t know how.”
“I know that’s what we’re here for.” Said Paige. They used a spell and got Sara inside the house.

“Who the hell are you?” Asked Liza.
“Ah Sara.”
“Where are my sisters?” Asked Piper.
“Ah.” Said Sara. She raised her arms and Phoebe and Paige did another spell making it look like Sara had powers.
“Go away!” Yelled Liza shooting back. More magic and Liza disappeared. “Ahhhhhhhhhhhh!” Paige and Phoebe came in.
“Dad.” Said Phoebe.
“What happened?” Asked Victor waking up.
“Sara kicked ass.” Said Paige.
“It’s coming!” Yelled Piper.
“I can do it!” Sara had an adrenaline rush. She delivered the baby.

Sara got home and couldn’t find her husband.
“Where is he?” Asked Sara.
“The news came in.” Said Trish. Sara shook Trish.
“Tell me!”
“The Undertaker is dead.” Said Trish. Sara shook her head she just couldn’t believe it.

The girls heard a noise in the attic. Paige and Phoebe entered while Leo and Victor took care of Piper and baby downstairs. Phoebe entered first and a hand clamped on her mouth.
“Hohgohgao.” Muffled Phoebe.
“Let my sister go.” Said Paige. The person came out of the shadows.
“I need you to hide me.” Said Undertaker.
“What do you mean?” Asked Paige. Undertaker took his hand away from Phoebe’s mouth.
“Yeah what do you mean?”
“I need to hide out for the next few months, it’s the only way it will work.”
“How?” Asked Paige.
“I need people to believe I’m dead.” Said Undertaker. The two girls looked at eachother they knew the Undertaker wouldn’t ask unless there was a reason.

But would they help the Undertaker?

TBC....

Chapter 61
Mourning

The bad guys in the realms were having a party, the Undertaker was dead. The good guys were bothered by it. Most of all Sara of course. But Undertaker had to keep it a secret for the time being.

Phoebe and Paige brought Undertaker downstairs. He quickly turned around when he saw Piper, Leo and baby in the livingroom. Piper laying on the couch resting and Leo taking care of his son.
“Sorry.” Said Undertaker.
“It’s ok. You were the noise upstairs?” Asked Piper. Undertaker turned around.
“Yeah.”
“Wait till you hear this.” Said Phoebe as she and Paige told Leo and Piper Undertaker’s story.

“Let’s celebrate the Undertaker is dead!” Yelled Vince.
“Long dies the Undertaker!” Yelled Kurt. All the bad guys were busy getting drunk, celebrating Undertaker’s death.

“Well what do you think?” Asked Paige.
“Wow.” Said Piper.
“Buried alive?” Asked Leo.
“I knew that Vince was going to have Kane help him.” Said Undertaker.
“Why didn’t you have your brother stopped?” Asked Paige.
“It was necessary to come back.”
“As what?” Asked Leo.
“The Dark.”
“That’s evil.” Said Piper.
“No wait sis you have to hear this, dark can also be good.” Said Phoebe.
“What are you going to be?” Asked Piper.
“Good and evil.”
“What do you mean?” Asked Leo.
“Good to the good, evil to the bad.”
“Sounds like my kind of man.” Said Paige.
“You hide me out for a while, I’ll help with anything I can when I turn back.”
“But what if you turn evil?” Asked Piper.
“There is always a danger of that, but I don’t intend to.” Said Undertaker.
“Mr Undertaker can you wait in the kitchen while we talk?” Asked Phoebe. Undertaker went to the kitchen.

Linda found Vince.
“Sorry to ruin your party Vince.” Said Linda.
“What do you want Linda?”
“You had Shane beat up, you beat up Stephanie and now you kill the Undertaker.”
“Of course.” Linda slapped her husband.
“You’ll pay for it all Vince.” She left and Vince laughed evilly.

Undertaker was called back into the livingroom.
“You can stay, we’ll hide you out.” Said Piper.
“Thank you.” Said Undertaker.
“Yeah I think we’ll give you a fake eulogy to.” Said Phoebe.
“Kane has to do that.” Said Undertaker.
“Then I’ll go talk to Kane.” Phoebe was going to leave and Undertaker grabbed her arm.
“Be careful.”
“I’ll have a proposition that he won’t be able to refuse.” Said Phoebe.
“Ya honey that’s what we’re afraid of.” Said Piper. After Phoebe left Undertaker asked.
“What’s baby’s name?”
“Ah we don’t know.” Said Leo.
“A P word, Polonius?” Asked Paige.
“No.” Said Piper and Leo.
“Patrick?” Suggested Leo.
“No.” Said Piper.
“Wyatt?” Asked Undertaker.
“I like that.” Said Piper.
“Me to.” Said Leo.
“Wyatt.” Said Piper.
“Wyatt Halliwell.” Said Leo.
“That’s my last name.” Said Piper.
“He’s a Halliwell all the way.” Said Leo. It was to be Wyatt Halliwell courtesy of the Undertaker.

Phoebe talked to Kane and he actually didn’t hurt her. Guess he was too happy his brother was dead.

The next night he went to the square, all the heels and faces gathered. The Halliwell sisters and Leo was there as well. Undertaker was at home with baby Wyatt. There was a picture of the Undertaker in the background. All the good guys were crying. Sara was still stunned, she never cried. The sisters stood behind her. They wished they could tell her.
“I’m here to give my brother’s eulogy.” Said Kane. More cries. “But I can’t do that. See I can’t do that cause my brother is a fraud.”
“No!” Cried the good guys.
“I saw how he rescued Stephanie, changing from the dark to a biker all to get people to like him. He’s been a fraud for the last few years.”
“The jerk.” Whispered Phoebe about Kane.
“Do you think he liked you all? Do you think he liked anyone? He was using Stephanie.”
“I had enough.” Said Sara as she walked away. The sisters and Leo went with her.
“It’s ok.” Said Piper.
“I can’t believe he’s dead, but it’s not right that his brother should talk like that about him.” Said Sara.
“Don’t worry wherever Undertaker is up or down I’m sure he’ll be watching out for you.” Said Phoebe.
“I’m going home.” Said Sara.
“You need someone with you.” Said Leo.
“I have Trish, all I want to do is go home and sleep.” Said Sara.
“If you need anything we’re here.” Said Paige.
“Thank you.” Said Sara.

The sisters and Leo got home.
“How is Wyatt?” Asked Piper.
“Upstairs sleeping.” Said Undertaker handing her the baby monitor.
“Thanks.” Said Leo.
“How is Sara?” Asked Undertaker.
“She hasn’t cried yet, but she’s in shock.” Said Phoebe.
“I hate to do this to her.” Said Undertaker.
“Then why do you? You could have told her I don’t think she would tell anyone.” Said Paige.
“I couldn’t let it leak.” All of a sudden Leo disappeared.
“Leo?” Asked Piper.
“Leo?” Called Phoebe and Paige.

Leo was placed in a cage that he couldn’t escape from in the Valhalley realm.
“Where am I?” Asked Leo.
“You’re in Valhalley my pet.” Said a girl that looked like an amazon girl.
“Who are you?”
“Teresa, just call me Teresa.” Leo didn’t know how he would get out of this one.

Would the charmed ones and Undertaker find out where Leo had gone.

TBC....

Chapter 62
Bang the Drum Slowly

“Ok where is my husband?” Asked Piper.
“You been asking that all night as we worked on spells to find him no such luck honey.” Said Phoebe.
“Leoooooooooooooo!” Undertaker entered the attic. He took one look at Piper and said:
“She needs sleep.”
“Ya ok you can try we tried all night and it didn’t work.” Said Paige. They heard Wyatt cry on the monitor.
“My baby.” Piper went to go and tend to him but Undertaker grabbed her arm. Aunty Phoebe tended to Wyatt. “Hey!” Protested Piper. Undertaker put his hand over here eyes and started a dark chant.
“It’s begun already.” Noted Paige. Piper fell in Undertaker’s arms. Undertaker placed her on the old 20's style sofa they had in the attic.
“Yes.” Phoebe came in with Wyatt.
“What happened to Piper?”
“She’s sleeping.” Said Undertaker covering her up with a blanket.
“Wyatt ok?” Asked Paige.
“Yeah just needed a diaper change.” Said Phoebe.

Eric Bischoff had a meeting with Vince.
“I want to join with you?”
“Why?” Asked Vince.
“Because your wife made sure that Austin and myself both together were in charge of half of the realms.”
“Problem?”
“Yeah Austin is too goody, goody I want to rule alone.” Said Eric.
“Not alone with me.” Said Vince.
“With you.” They agreed to work together to make sure evil ruled the realms.

“I’m actually shocked you are feeding me.” Said Leo.
“Sure why not, can’t have you starved.” Said Teresa.
“What do you plan to do with me?” Asked Leo.
“Hmmmm I don’t know yet.” Said Teresa.

Tyson Tomko and his new girlfriend Trish Stratus went to see Eric Bischoff.
“We want to help.” Said Trish.
“Help with what?” Asked Eric.
“To clean up the goody trash.” Said Tomko slamming his large fist into his hand. Kane came in. He pushed Trish out of the way.
“Hey.” Said Trish.
“Eric talk now.” Said Kane.
“Alright Kane and myself have some business to discuss.” Said Eric.
“Why the hell would you with this....” Tomko didn’t get a chance to finish. Kane grabbed him around the neck.
“Trish get him out of here before I do something that I’m not going to like.” Said Kane.
“Yeah ok, let’s go.” Trish and Tomko left shutting the door behind them. Kane and Eric sat down and talked.

“He’s in the valhalley realms.” Said Undertaker.
“Are you sure?” Asked Piper.
“I sensed him.” Piper and Phoebe left the room but Paige lagged behind. “What?” Asked Undertaker.
“You’re voice got more scary.”
“Yesssssssssssss.” Paige left she didn’t want to piss off the Undertaker.

Kane went after Stacy Keibler and Kevin Nash rescued her.
“Damsel in distress?” Asked Kevin.
“Something like that.” Said Stacy. Eric Bischoff came along.
“Nash you’re fired and disbanded from the realms.”
“Go to hell Eric.” Nash packed up and went to the TNA realms the very next day.

“Ok so how do we get into the valhalley realms?” Asked Piper.
“Dress like amazon women?” Suggested Phoebe.
“Good idea.” Said Paige. They came up with a spell to make them look like amazon women. Low cut and leather everything.
“Now we’re ready.” Said Piper.
“Ok let’s get Undertaker to take care of Wyatt well we kick bad guy butt.” Said Phoebe.

“Are you laughing at me?” Asked the over 7 foot Big Show.
“No Show I’m not.” Said a scared Torrie Wilson.
“How do I know?”
“Because I was laughing at a joke.” Said Torrie.
“Grrrrrrrrrr.” Torrie began to run from the Big Show.

“Leo.” Said Piper.
“How did you get in here?” Asked Leo.
“We might ask the same from you.” Said Paige.
“Hey guys look a demon looking monster.” Said Phoebe. They quickly got Leo out and made a portal to their realm but the thing followed them.
“Watch out!” Yelled Paige to Undertaker. Undertaker took Wyatt out of there. Bing bang boom another person showed up and got rid of the demon monster.
“Who the hell are you?” Asked Piper.
“Chris.” Leo got orbed again.
“Leo!” Yelled Piper.
“The protectors called him.” Said Chris.
“What for?” Asked Phoebe.
“Where did you come from?” Asked Paige.
“The future.” Said Chris.

“You can run but you can’t hide.” Said Big Show. Torrie screamed all the way to a car park. He found her. She climbed a high beam and he followed her up.
“Show please I wasn’t laughing at you.” Begged Torrie. The other side of the realms ruler Kurt Angle found Show.
“Show put Torrie down.” Big Show put Torrie down.
“Ok.” Big Show picked up Kurt Angle and threw him to the bottom of the car park.
“Ahhhhhhhhhhhh!” Screamed Torrie.

Chris went to the protectors after explaining to the sister’s he’s from the future and there to help.
“They made me a guardian.” Said Leo.
“I know.”
“Why?”
“I made sure of it.” Said Chris.
“Who are you?”
“A fellow white lighter.” Said Chris.
“Where will you be?” Asked Leo.
“Helping the sisters get rid of the biggest evil in the world.”
“From your time?”
“Yes, now I have to go.” Said Chris.

It was revealed that Kurt Angle would be in a wheelchair for awhile.
“I think I should find another ruler.” Said McMahon.
“Vince I can do it.” Said Angle.
“Are you sure?”
“Yeah I’m sure.”
“Ok then.” Said Vince.

Chris went to Valhalley realms.
“You were supposed to keep him here.” Said Chris.
“Hey some bimbos tried to get him.” Said Teresa.
“Yeah and they won.” Said Chris.
“Who are they?” Asked Teresa.
“The charmed ones.” Said Chris.
“Good luck.” Said Teresa. Chris orbed out of the realm.

Victoria found Molly Holly.
“You’re not going to lick me are you?” Asked Molly Holly.
“No I thought with Kane on the loose you and I should stick together to defend ourselves.” Said Victoria.

“Exactly what I was thinking.” Said Molly.

“Leo!” Yelled Piper. Chris came in.
“What are you doing here?” Asked Phoebe.
“Leo is a Guardian.” Said Chris.
“No I want my husband!” Yelled Piper.
“No I’m your protector now.” Said Chris.
“I don’t want you I want my husband! Leo!” Yelled Piper.
“You won’t see him until you do what you have to do.” Said Chris. Undertaker grabbed him around the neck.
“Talk now!” Demanded Undertaker.
“Who’s this narbo?” Asked Chris.
“He’s our protector and we don’t need you.” Said Piper.
“Fine.” Chris orbed.
“Leo!” Yelled Piper.
“Don’t worry honey we’ll get him back.” Said Phoebe. Piper put her head on Undertaker’s arms.
“I can’t stand a woman crying.” Said Undertaker.
“Big Bad Undertaker.” Joked Paige.
“I want my husband.” Sobbed Piper.
“We’ll get him back. Undertaker don’t you think Piper needs a nap?” Asked Phoebe.
“Huh?” Asked the clueless Undertaker.
“You know a nap.” Hinted paige. Undertaker did a sleep spell on Piper and picked her up to take her upstairs. Paige and Phoebe set out to get Leo back.

TBC....

Chapter 63
Amok

Chris showed up again.
“You ready to let me help?” Asked Chris.
“We have the Undertaker we don’t need you.” Said Piper. Undertaker stood arms crossed to his chest.
“You can have him but he doesn’t know the future.” Undertaker grabbed Chris’ collar.
“You think you’re better then me boy?” Paige stopped Undertaker from killing Chris.
“No don’t not this way.”
“Grrr.” Undertaker let him go.
“We’ll play your way Chris for now, until we get Leo back. But know something.” Said Phoebe.
“What?” Asked Chris.
“I don’t know why you’re here or where you came from but Undertaker is going to be watching your ass.”
“That’s fine as long as he protects yours.” Chris and Undertaker stood toe to toe.

A man with white hair, dressed in white, carrying a symbol on a stick came to visit Vince.
“You need me.” Said the man.
“Who are you?” Asked Vince.
“Mordecai.”
“What are you good for?”
“I will punish the ones that think they do good.”
“Sounds like my type of person.” Said Vince.
“Mr. McMahon you don’t need him.” Said Kurt Angle.
“Oh I think I do, he’ll take care of the good guys and I don’t have to lift a finger.” Mordecai was glad to hear that.

“Ok there is a new guy in town and you have to combat him.” Said Chris.
“On our terms.” Said Piper.
“No on mine.” He turned them into roman goddesses.
“What happened?” Asked Undertaker looking at the sisters stunned.
“The new guy in town is a guy named Mordecai you have to stop him from turning the world upside down.”
“He can’t do that.” Said Paige.
“Yeah well once he messes with the elements all the realms will be in trouble.”
“Chris Make love not war.” Said Phoebe using her goddess power to leave.
“Phoebe!” Yelled Chris.
“Man I need a fight.” Said Paige using her power to leave.
“Paige!” Yelled Chris.
“Well I guess I have to go and stop them.” Said Piper.
“Yeah you do that’s why I made you the goddess of reason.” Said Chris.
“What am I supposed to do with that?” Asked Piper.
“Keep the family together.” Said Undertaker. He looked sad.
“You miss Sara.” Said Piper.
“Yeah.” Said Undertaker. Piper put her arm around him.
“It’s ok. I’m here if you need to talk.”
“Hey he’s not important. Saving the world from evil is.” Said Chris. Undertaker grabbed his neck again.
“I think you better take that back. He’s been a good friend to us.” Said Piper.
“I take it back.”
“Undertaker let go.” Said Piper. Undertaker let go.
“Ok I’ll go find my sisters.” Said Piper using her goddess power to leave and find them.

Kane bashed Gail Kim into a wall.
“What are you doing?” Asked Stacy.
“Leave me alone please.” Said Gail. Kane stalked Gail and picked her up.
“No Kane please.” Said Stacy.
“Please leave me alone.” Said Gail.
“I’m evillllllllllllllllll!” Yelled Kane. One more smash and Gail was out for the count.

Piper found Phoebe at a pick up auction.
“Ok lets go.”
“I don’t want to fight.”
“Yeah I know you want to make love let’s go.” Said Piper getting Phoebe out of there.

Stacy and Gail Kim went to see Vince.
“Gail wants leave forever.”
“Why?” Asked Vince.
“Kane.”
“I should let you suffer, you’re a slave.”
“I want to go back to the Canad realms.” Said Gail.
“I will grant it get out of my sight.” Gail Kim went back to the Canad Realms.

Piper found Paige practising war on some guy bums.
“Take that.” Said Paige.
“Ok sweetie lets go.” Said Piper.
“Oh pooh.” Said Paige. Piper brought Paige to Halliwell Haven where Phoebe was waiting.

“I think we need to team together.” Said Regal.
“I scratch your ass you scratch mine?” Asked Tajiri.
“Your back and mine back.” Said Regal.
“Right, deal.” They shook on it.

When the girls got back to the house they found Phoebe with her arms wrapped around Undertaker. And Undertaker having that help me look.
“Ok sweetie step away from the deadman.” Said Piper.
“Oh pooh.” Said Phoebe.
“Can we focus?” Asked Chris.
“We do it our way Chris.” Said Piper. The girls went to the kitchen.

“What are you doing?” Asked Vince.
“Making rain.” Said Mordecai.
“I want you to go after good guys.”
“I do that to but right now disasters.” Said Mordecai.

Eugene was called to Stamford Square by Coach.
“Eugene you have a fan that wants to meet you.” Said Coach.
“I’m a good witch who would want to meet me?” Asked the simple Eugene.
“Watch.” Said Coach. Kane came out. He stuck out his hand indicating for Eugene to take it. Eugene hugged Kane and Kane hugged him back.
“Hey Kane you’re supposed to beat him up.” Kane looked at Coach and broke away from Eugene. He looked at both men then went after Coach. Eugene tried to stop Kane.
“No, no that’s not good, it’s evil.” Kane turned around and grabbed Eugene and tombstoned him. Coach tried to high five Kane but Kane gave him a dirty look and Coach ran away.

While the sisters worked on how to get rid of Mordecai Vince was getting bitchy.
“You’re supposed to be getting rid of the good. Not cause destruction of the world.”
“If I were you I would be more concerned with your ho and your right hand man.” Said Mordecai.
“What?” Asked Vince.
“Go check in your bedroom.” Said Mordecai. Vince left and the charmed ones orbed in.
“Hey bad guy looking for us?” Asked Paige.
“Always looking for a fight.” Said Mordecai. Paige picked up her goddess weapon that looked like a pitch fork and aimed at Mordecai.
“Ahhhhhhhhhhhhh!” He was no longer. They left.

“You’re fired Sable!” Yelled Vince.
“What about Brock?” Asked Sable.
“He can stay I don’t have anymore use for you.” Said Vince leaving the room.
“Don’t worry baby I’ll take care of things here.” Said Brock.
“Ok.” Said Sable. Sable left the realms. She had to Vince would make her life hell if she didn’t.

“Ok we killed the dude in white can we go?” Asked Paige.
“No it’s just started.” Said Chris.
“What?” Asked Phoebe.
“The biggest hell that ruins everything in my time.”
“We’re not concerned with your time we’re concerned with now.” Said Piper.
“If you don’t fix it they’re won’t be anytime.” Said Chris.
“Undertaker can we see you in the kitchen?” Asked Phoebe. Chris stayed in the livingroom with Wyatt who put a shield up around himself.
“Yeah I know you don’t trust. It’s cause of you the world turns bad you’ll learn to trust me.” Said Chris.

“Well?” Asked Piper.
“I can’t get a proper reading on him.” Said Undertaker.
“Could your brother?” Asked Phoebe.
“If he’s evil yeah.”
“Then we’ll tell him let Kane do his work on him or we won’t help anymore.” Said Paige.
“You’ll have to do it somewhere else.” Said Undertaker.
“Yeah we know privacy.” Said Piper. They went to tell Chris the new game plan.

Would Chris co-operate and let Kane do a reading on him?

TBC.....

Chapter 64
This Porridge Just Right

“Oh we kicked some ass.” Said Paige.
“Yeah good guy ass.” Said Phoebe. Piper went to the book of shadows but it closed. Suddenly the sisters turned into blonde girls.
“Ok this isn’t going to work if we can’t fool the book.” Said the one that was supposed to be Piper.
“Kim we know that.”
“Shut up Heather.” Said Kim.
“Yeah Kim fer sure we know that.” Said the third one pretending to be Phoebe.
“You always have to be a dumb blonde?” Asked Kim.
“You’re blonde to so there.” Said Sharon. From the hall they heard:
“I keep hearing noises in the attic.” Said Phoebe.
“Are you sure you’re not imagining it?” Asked Piper.
“No.”
“Gun it.” Said Kim. The three blonde witches magically took a carpet ride.
“That’s funny I could have sworn I left the book of shadows open.” Said Paige.
“Maybe you closed it and forgot about it?” Suggested Piper.
“Maybe but I thought I left it open cause the phone call came in for me and I was coming right back.” Undertaker came in with baby Wyatt. He handed Wyatt to Piper.
“Baby crying.”
“Thanks.” Said Piper. “What’s the matter sweetie?” Piper went to look after her son.
“Undertaker did you hear anything in the attic?” Asked Phoebe.
“I was downstairs.”
“See he was downstairs, drop it, it’s your over reactive imagination.” Said Paige.
“Guess you’re right.” Said Phoebe. The three of them left the attic. The three blonde witches came back.
“That was close.” Said Heather.
“Yeah like totally.” Said Sharon.
“This isn’t a gidget movie.” Said Kim.
“More like valley girl.” Said Heather.
“How do we fool everyone?” Asked Sharon.
“I gotta spell come on.” The three left again.

Meanwhile Kane decided to beat up Matt Hardy. Lita came along.
“Kane stop!” Kane dropped the passed out Matt, grabbed Lita, gave her a kiss and whispered something in her ear. She nodded and as he left she tended to Matt.

The three girls as the sisters came back when the real sisters were gone. The one named Kim opened the book of shadows.
“I told you using an identity spell would work.” Said Kim.
“Ya but we don’t look like them.” Said Sharon.
“Shut up you moron we don’t need to.” Said Heather.
“Like totally what ya mean?” Asked Sharon.
“We have their identities we don’t need to look like them.” Said Kim.
“Ohhhh yeah right I gotcha.” Said Sharon.

Meanwhile Phoebe went to work at the paper.
“May I help you?” Asked Pilar.
“Pilar it’s me Phoebe.”
“Ah no you’re not Phoebe.” Phoebe looked at her shocked.

Back at Halliwell Haven Chris came in.
“Ok you ready to get back to work?” Asked Chris.
“Like fer sure.” Said Sharon as Phoebe.
“Ah what’s wrong with her?” Asked Chris.
“I don’t know, maybe she’s sick?” Suggested Kim as Piper.
“Ok whatever lets go.” Said Chris.
“As you wish moron.” Said Heather as Paige.
“What?” Asked Chris.
“She said as you wish big guy.” Said Kim as Piper.
“Ok then.” Chris and the others orbed out.

“Ok Kane I’m here what do you want?” Asked Lita.
“To talk sit.” Said Kane.

“Where is Piper?” Asked Leo at P3.
“I am Piper.” Said the real Piper.
“No you’re not who are you a friend?”
“Honey it’s me.”
“I’ll call the cops.” Leo picked up the cell and the real Piper got the hell out of there.

Matt went to Stamford Square and demanded an answer:
“Kane why the hell did you beat me up.” On the big realm screen Lita showed on a chair.
“Matt I don’t want to see you anymore.”
“What?” Asked Matt.
“You gotta believe me Matt. Kane I can’t do this anymore.” Kane showed.
“Kane!”
“Bad idea Lita.” Kane laughed evilly.
“Ahhhhhhhhhhhhhh! Matt I’m in the warehouse!” Yelled Lita. Matt went to get Lita.

The girls got to the house. But they couldn’t go in orbing or regular.
“Ok this is strange.” Said Piper.
“Did either of you find out that people didn’t know it was you?” Asked Paige.
“Yeah I thought that was strange.” Said Phoebe.
“You think it’s magic?” Asked Piper.
“Yeah now what do we do?” Asked Paige.
“Get the Undertaker by phone?” Suggested Phoebe.
“We can’t do that we promised he wouldn’t be disclosed.” Said Piper.
“Yeah I know.” Said Phoebe.

Matt got Lita back but Kane found them walking in a park. Kane went after Matt and put his arms around Lita and whispered in her ear.
“Ok.” Said Lita. Kane smiled evilly.

No Chris in sight but the three blonde witches as the sisters were in the livingroom. Undertaker came in.
“The baby is sleeping.”
“What baby?” Asked Kim as Piper.
“Yeah right.” Said Undertaker shaking his head going to the kitchen.
“Ok fer sure now what?” Asked Sharon as Phoebe.
“You tell us?” Asked Heather.

Chris orbed into the kitchen.
“You’re stupid.” Said Undertaker.
“You’re ugly what’s the point?” Asked Chris.
“Didn’t your parents teach you any respect boy?” Asked Undertaker.
“You called me stupid I fired back.” Said Chris.
“You’re stupid cause those aren’t the sisters.”
“Yeah ok.”
“You want to try me?” Asked Undertaker.
“Go on.” Said Chris.

“Ok I’m here get it over with.” Said Lita.
“Get on the bed.” Said Kane. Lita did as she was told. Kane kissed her and she closed her eyes to what he was about to do.

Undertaker used dark magic to get the real sisters into the house.
“How that happen?” Asked Piper.
“Oh shit.” Said Kim.
“Undertaker.” Noted Paige.
“I new it wouldn’t work.” Said Heather.
“Ok who the hell are you?” Asked Phoebe.
“The charmed ones fer sure.” Said Sharon.
“I don’t think so honey.” Said Paige. The sisters kicked some butt, Undertaker did another spell to get back their identities and the three blonde witches weren’t heard from again.
“How did you do that?” Asked Chris.
“You can’t fool a deadman.” Said Undertaker.
“Thanks.” Said Piper. She went up to see baby Wyatt.
“What will we do without you when you go?” Asked Phoebe.
“I’m leaving soon.” Said Undertaker.
“Why?” Asked Paige.
“It’s time for me soon to face my brother.” Said Undertaker. They nodded.

Lita ran, she ran cause she was afraid of Kane. And she sure hoped that he didn’t give her any child.

*yes I know I started the Kane, Lita and Matt storyline before the Undertaker and Kane feud at WM 20 but eh who cares. This way two storylines mixed together.

*Dedicated to fellow DOD and my sisters since 1992 Kimberly Grace Henry, Sharon Ann Crouch Kardynal Hanson, and Heather Marie Stoddart.

TBC....

Chapter 65
Kane on the Run

Matt was in Stamford Square again.
“Kane, what I’m going to say to Lita right now I want you to stay out of our lives.” No answer from the big screen. “Lita.”
“Yes Matt?”
“Will you mar-.....” Matt couldn’t finish Kane came on.
“Oh Matttttttttt.”
“Get lost!” Yelled Matt.
“I think you better ask Lita about her condition.” Said Kane.
“What condition.”
“I was listening on your conversation with Stacy, Lita, tell him.” Said Kane.
“Lita?” Asked Matt. She shook her head. Tears in her eyes.
“Lita is pregnant with my baby.” Said Kane.
“You son of a bitch!” Yelled Matt.
“Ask Lita.” Said Kane.
“Is that true?” Asked Matt.
“Matt, I?” Lita ran, she wanted to run from both men.

Meanwhile Piper got the deadman a cloth to wipe himself. He spit out coffee when he heard Kane’s news.
“Do you think it’s true?” Asked Paige.
“Only one way to find out.” Said Undertaker.
“How?” Asked Piper.
“I gotta start making myself known.” Said Undertaker.
“Is that the best thing to do?” Asked Phoebe.
“It’s time.”

Kane was chasing Lita. Then they got to Stamford Square. All of a sudden a message showed up on the big screen.
“Kane, 1, 2, I’m coming for you.” Kane stopped to look at the Undertaker’s message. Lita got out.

Lita used her cell somewhere nearby.
“Matt Please pick up.” Said Lita. Matt wasn’t answering again she decided to go somewhere safe.

While Lita was planning her safe house Kane went to terrorize the slaves.
“Hey leave us alone!” Yelled Christian.
“Oh no I don’t intend to.” Lightning then rain, the rain on Kane only.
“Yay.” Said Christian.
“Don’t get cocky he might go after us again.” Said Edge. Kane went to leave. “Kane! I’ll get you back for this.” Said Edge.

“Please help me.” Said Lita.
“Come in.” Said Sara.
“I’m scared I don’t know what to do.” Said Lita.
“We need deadman.” Said Trish.
“Please I can’t stay alone.”
“You’ll stay here.” Said Sara.
“Look on tv, Kane got another warning.” Said Trish.
“What do you mean?” Asked Sara.
“He’s been getting signs all over that someone’s coming back for him.” Said Trish.
“You don’t think?” Asked Lita.
“No, he’s dead, we gotta accept that and move on.” Said Sara. Trish and Lita didn’t want to accept that fact.

Kane kept getting haunted, morning, noon and night. He finally sought out McMahon.
“My brother he doesn’t sleep.”
“Your brother is dead.”
“No he’s not, he’s coming back for me.” Said Kane.
“So what do you want me to do about it?” Asked Vince.
“I want him.”
“Next week.” Said Vince.
“Next week.”
“And your brother will rest in peace.” Said Vince. The two men laughed evilly.

Word got around that the Undertaker was alive and coming back. Sara didn’t know what to make of it. Meanwhile a meeting was made with Lita and Matt at Sara’s house.
“Matt please I did it to save you.” Said Lita.
“You slept with him to save me?”
“Yes.”
“Whose baby is it Lita?”
“I don’t know Matt.”
“Well when you find out tell me.” Matt left.
“I think you need to find out.” Said Sara.
“No I can’t, what if it’s his?” Asked Lita.
“You need to know.” Said Trish.
“I’m too scared.”

Next week came quick, with messages to Kane all over.
“You ready big guy?” Asked Phoebe.
“Yes.”
“You look good.” Said Paige.
“Paige.” Said Piper.
“I’m just saying.” Undertaker combined his dark image with his biker image.
“He looks hot.” Said Phoebe.
“He’s married.” Said Piper.
“Oh yeah.” Said Paige.
“Good luck.” Said Leo. Undertaker nodded then went to Stamford Square to fight his brother.

He beat his brother then Sara came in. She slapped him across the face.
“What?” He asked in his dark voice.
“That’s for pretending you’re dead.”
“Are you mad at me?”
“Am I mad at you?” She hugged him. He hugged her back.

They got home.
“Undertaker!” Said Lita and Trish together.
“Before we go upstairs you need to check on something.” Said Sara. Undertaker nodded, pointed to Lita then the couch in the livingroom.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Trish.
“It’s ok trust him.” Said Sara. Lita put her trust in the Undertaker. She laid down. He put his hand on her stomach. He used dark magic to find out what she needed to know. After he was done he didn’t say anything. He took his hand away.
“Undertaker, is the baby Matt or Kane’s?” Asked Lita.
“Well?” Asked Sara.
“Yeah well?” Asked Trish. Undertaker didn’t know how to answer that.

Was the baby Matt or Kane’s?

TBC....

Chapter 66
Groovy

“Kane’s.” Replied Undertaker. Lita had tears in her eyes.
“Thank you.” She left the house.
“Go after her.” Said Sara.
“She has to work things out herself.” Said Undertaker.
“You really are a deadman.” Said Trish.
“Grrrrrrrrr.” Said Undertaker.
“I think I’ll go to bed.” Said Trish.

“Yes Mr McMahon?” Asked Victoria.
“I want you to find out who is responsible for the Undertaker being alive.”
“As you wish Mr McMahon.” Victoria did some black magic to find out what he wanted to know.

Lita sought out Matt.
“Is Undertaker back?” Asked Matt.
“Yes.”
“That’s good.” Said Matt.
“Matt the baby is Kane’s.”
“Are you sure?”
“Undertaker did his dark stuff.” Matt turned away from Lita. “Matt please say something.”
“Do you want me Lita?”
“You know I do.”
“Then we gotta tell Kane.”
“I agree that’s why I came to find you.” Matt hugged Lita and Lita hugged him back.

“The charmed ones.” Said Victoria.
“What?” Asked an angry Vince.
“The charmed ones.” Repeated Victoria.
“From now on I want you to keep an eye on them the first opportunity you have to get rid of them do it.” Said Vince.
“Killing?” Asked a happy Victoria.
“Hell no! I want them out of my hair for good.”
“Yes Mr McMahon.” Said Victoria.

Paul Bearer came to visit Undertaker.
“You did good my boy.”
“I want you by my side again Paul.”
“Of course we have to stop Vince and his tribe somehow.” Said Paul Bearer.
“And we will.” Said Undertaker.

Meanwhile Victoria found her first opportunity. The girls were in the attic.
“Man I love these cool boots.” Said Paige.
“I wonder where they came from.” Said Piper.
“You don’t know?” Asked Phoebe.
“They’re cool.” Said Paige putting them on. After she did that she disappeared.
“Paige?” Asked the other two sisters.

Paul Heyman found a jolt of power working with Vince. He sent for friends Rey Mysterio and Eddie Guerreo to Stamford Square.
“You two are going to fight eachother, whoever loses will go to the slave area.” Said Heyman.
“No way homes.” Said Eddie.
“I’m not fighting him he’s my brother.” Said Rey.
“Tough the fight will start now and there isn’t a man alive that could stop me.” As Heyman backed away from the square. The Undertaker and Paul Bearer came out. They backed Heyman into the square. Undertaker took his coat off and handed it to Paul Bearer and He then put it aside. He then took off his black ten gallon hat. He was wearing his bandana underneath. The very one that Kane took.
“Oh my god!” Yelled Heyman. Undertaker looked at Eddie and Rey after Heyman went by them. Heyman had fear in his eyes. Eddie and Rey nodded and pushed Heyman towards the Undertaker. Undertaker picked up Heyman and tombstoned him. Eddie and Rey, Rey were grateful.

“Hey you brought back my boots, groovy.”
“Who are you?” Asked Paige.
“That depends who are you looking for.”
“I don’t think I belong here.”
“You have my boots, I cast a spell on them to come back to me.”
“So who is me?”
“Well my flower child name is Lovie but my real name is Penny Halliwell.”
“Are you serious.’
“Are you trippin?”
“No I’m not, believe it or not.”
“Who may you be?”
“I’m ah Paige.”
“Far out.”

Meanwhile Victoria was in the past Halliwell Haven Livingroom. Past Leo and a girl were talking.
“Eva you’re like bumming my trip man.”
“Blech.” Victoria was grossed out.
“I’m studying witch craft Leo.”
“Eva you’re best friends with Penny I thought we could have a threesome.”
“Her flower child name is Lovie.”
“Don’t bum me out man, if you need a lesson just come to me.”
“Get ready for the moon party Leo.” Said Eva.
“Bingo.” Said Victoria hiding herself using magic.

Back in the future.
“Where the hell did she go?” Asked Piper.
“Again you’re asking me?” Asked Phoebe.
“Leo!” Yelled Piper but Chris came in.
“Where is Paige?” Asked Chris.
“Why are you here?” Asked Piper.
“You know why.” Said Chris. “Where is Paige.”
“We don’t know.” Said Phoebe.
“What do you mean you don’t know?” Asked Chris. Phoebe explained what happened.


“I have a proposition for you Matt.” Said Kane.
“I’m listening.”
“You fight me, if you lose I marry Lita.”
“Deal.”
“Matt no!” Said Lita.

“Trish get me some coffee.” Said Undertaker.
“You’re a deadman you need sleep.” Trish tried to rub his shoulders but he pushed her away.
“I’m married.”
“I know.”
“Trish I think you need to go back to the slaves.”
“I’ll be good Undertaker.”
“Go and pack.”
“Forget it I didn’t have anything I’ll go myself.”
“I find you aren’t there and I’ll put you over my knee.”
“Yes Undertaker.” She left.

Back in the past. Victoria used Eva to her advantage.
“You want to kill Penny.” Whispered a still hidden Victoria.
“I want to kill Penny she’s a goody, goody.” Said Eva. Penny aka Lovie came downstairs with Paige.
“Lovie child who is this? A new child to add to the flow?” Asked Leo.
“Leo?” Asked a confused Paige.
“Do I know you?” Asked Leo.
“Ah no.” Said Paige.
“This is Paige.” Said Penny aka Lovie.
“Groovy.” Said Leo. He walked away.
“Who are all these people?” Asked Paige.
“Witches.” Said Penny aka Lovie.

Back in the future.
“Ok then I guess we go back and find her.” Said Piper.
“You have to cast the same spell that was on the boots.” Said Chris.
“We know that. Did we know that?” Asked Phoebe to Piper.
“Of course. Chris you better get out of here.” Said Piper.
“Why?”
“Cause I said so.”

Kane fought Matt in the Canad realm and won.
“Lita next week we will be married.” Lita hunched over a passed out Matt crying.
“Matt what did I do?” Trish came in. “Trish?”
“Hello Lita.” Trish slapped Lita.
“What?”
“You made Undertaker get rid of me.” Said Trish. She left a stunned Lita.

Back in the past they were at a drum circle in the park. Piper and Phoebe came in dressed in 60's garb.
“Hey groovy chick we were looking for you.” Said Phoebe.
“Oh good.” Said Paige.
“Are you friends with Paige?” Asked Penny aka Lovie.
“This is Penny aka Lovie the love child.” Said Paige.
“Gran?” Asked Phoebe.
“Are you two witches to?” Asked Penny aka Lovie.
“Witches?” Asked Piper.
“Yeah excuse me Lovie we need to talk.” Said Paige.
“Groovy.” Paige and Piper and Phoebe went to talk by a nearby tree.

Undertaker found Lita sitting on a bench.
“You lost.”
“Don’t rub my nose in it.” She begged.
“You have to do what’s right.”
“I know, but I don’t love your brother. I’ll always love Matt.” Undertaker forced her to look at him.
“I know.”
“Trish she came after me.”
“Did she?”
“What happened?”
“I don’t know. I’ll find her.” Said Undertaker. He left a sulking Lita.

“I’m going to kill you!” Yelled Eva.
“You’re bumming my trip man.” Said Leo in the attic to Eva who was carrying a knife.
“Do something!” Yelled Piper.
“Eva that’s not nice.” Said Penny aka Lovie.
“If you don’t do something quick you’ll never see us be born.” Said Phoebe.
“What?” Asked Penny aka Lovie.
“Never mind just use witchcraft to get rid of her.” Said Paige. Penny aka Lovie went over to Eva.
“What?” Asked Eva.
“That’s not nice.”
“We’re doomed.” Said Phoebe. A man came in. Eva slapped Penny aka Lovie.
“Hey.” Said Penny.
“Hey everyone.”
“Grandpa?” Whispered Piper. Eva turned around and used black magic, that Victoria gave her to kill him.
“Noooooooooooooooooooooooo!” Yelled Penny aka Lovie.
“My work here is done.” Said Victoria downstairs as she went to the future.

Back in the future Undertaker found Trish at a bar out of the realm in Canad.
“What are you doing here Undertaker?”
“You’re drunk.”
“I intend to get drunker and pick up Edge. We’re going to have lots of sex.” She laughed. He did a spell and she went nigh, night. He then picked her up and threw her over his shoulder.

Back in the past.
“Get out of this house Eva.”
“You’re too goody, goody for me.” Said Eva.
“Gran you need to do something else we’ll never be born if you don’t become strong.” Said Piper.
“Why do you keep calling me that?” Eva slapped Penny again.
“Do something she killed grandpa!” Yelled Phoebe. That got Penny mad she used wiccan magic to kill Eva.
“My name is Penny again and please someone tell me what’s going on.”
“Welcome back gran.” Said Phoebe. The three girls told Penny who they really were.

Back in the present. Undertaker took Trish back to the slaves. Then he paid Edge a visit.
“Stay away from Trish.” He warned.
“Why should I?” Asked Trish.
“I say so.” Undertaker rolled his eyes at Edge. Then he left.

“I have some groovy grand kids.” Said Penny.
“Thankfully you used that anger to get rid of evil.” Said Piper.
“I’ll bring you back to the future and then use a forget spell.” Said Penny.
“You are gran alright.” Said Phoebe.

“You gotta hide me, I saw my future Undertaker knows it’s me.” Said Victoria.
“Really?” Asked Vince.
“Hide me.” The door opened and Undertaker came in.
“Too late.” Said Vince running. Victoria tried to run but Undertaker grabbed her.
“This is a warning.”
“Yes?” She gulped.
“Stay away from evil.” She took his advice and stayed on the side of good.

“Good to be home.” Said Piper.
“Yeah.” Said Phoebe. Leo orbed in.
“How are you?” Asked Leo.
“What are you doing here?” Asked Piper.
“Thought we can talk.” Said Leo.
“Are you coming home?”
“Can we talk about it?” Asked Leo.
“Upstairs when you’re ready.” Piper went upstairs.
“Bummin my trip man?” Asked Paige.
“What?” Asked Leo.
“I took a trip to the 60's and saw you.” Said Paige.
“Ah.” Leo went upstairs to talk to Piper.

Kane and Lita were married. Undertaker went home after talking to Victoria.
“You gotta note.” Said Sara.
“From who?”
“It was by messenger.” Undertaker looked at it.
“Undertaker if you ever want to see Paul Bearer again be at the square tomorrow night.”
“Who is it?” Asked Sara.
“Not signed.” Said Undertaker.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Sara.
“Be at the square.” Said Undertaker taking his wife to bed.

“I want a divorce.” Said Piper.
“What?”
“Leo I want a divorce.”
“May I ask why?”
“I can’t be a single mom and not see you and then you pop up when you want to every so often.”
“Piper you don’t mean that.”
“Yeah I do.” Piper turned her back on Leo. Leo orbed he knew she was serious. He had to go to Undertaker to get the divorce. Piper picked up baby Wyatt.
“Daddy loves you Wyatt.” She kissed her son and stayed with him for hours.

TBC....

Chapter 67
What to do about something

Leo found Undertaker.
“Not now.”
“What do you mean?” Asked Leo.
“I have my own problems.”
“I need a divorce.”
“Why?”
“Piper wants one.”
“Tell her I want to see the both of you tonight at 8:00.”
“Ok.”
“Don’t be late.”
“I won’t thank you.” Leo orbed out. Sara put Undertaker’s coat on him.
“That’s what I like about you.”
“What?”
“Even if you have problems you help others.”
“As long as they don’t screw me around.” They kissed passionately.
“Good luck.” Said Sara. Undertaker left.

Undertaker found Paul Heyman in the square.
“Where is Paul Bearer?” Asked Undertaker grabbing Heyman’s throat.
“I think you need to let me go else you won’t find that out.” Undertaker let him go and the square feed showed up.
“Psst Undertaker up here.” Said Bubba Ray Dudley.
“Get your ass here!” Yelled Undertaker.
“You’re in no position to tell us what to do.” Said D-Von.
“Where is he?” Asked Undertaker.
“Behind this door and if you don’t do what Paul Heyman wants you’ll never see Paul Bearer again.” Said Bubba. Undertaker pointed at Heyman and to the doorway. Heyman took that cue and left. Undertaker had to wait for what they wanted him to do.

That night Leo and Piper showed up.
“Ok Undertaker what do you want?” Asked Piper.
“Sara take him to the kitchen and get him something to drink.” Said Undertaker.
“Sure.” Said Sara holding Leo’s hand and then she took him to the kitchen. Undertaker pointed to the couch and Piper sat. He sat beside her.
“I don’t have time for this deadman.” Said an exhausted Undertaker.
“Look at me.” She did. “Do you want a divorce?”
“Yes.”
“You’re tired.”
“I know that, it’s part of the reason why I want a divorce.” He did a sleep spell and she went to sleep.
“Ok.” Said Undertaker. Sara brought Leo in.
“What did you do to my wife?”
“Might be ex wife.”
“What did you do to her?”
“Nothing she’s sleeping.” Leo made a move to pick her up but Undertaker stopped him.
“What?” Asked Leo.
“She’ll stay here tonight, I’ll talk to her in the morning.”
“You invite us here to put her to sleep?”
“Yes.”
“Why?”
“My business.” Sara saw the look in her husband’s eyes and pushed Leo to the door.
“Thank you for coming I’ll keep you posted.” Said Sara.
“But.” Said Leo.
“No but’s go.” Leo left. Undertaker picked up Piper and the two of them brought her to a spare bedroom.

The next morning Piper came downstairs.
“What happened.”
“Eat.” Said Undertaker. Piper sat down and Sara got her some food.
“Well?”
“You slept.”
“I know. But why?”
“I wanted to find out what’s in your head.”
“What’s in it?”
“You want a divorce.”
“I know that are you going to grant it?”
“Yes.” Heyman came in un announced.
“Undertaker you fight the Dudley’s in one hour.”
“I’ll be there.”
“I know you’ll do the right thing.” Said Heyman. He left.
“If you need help we’re here.” Said Piper. She left.

Heyman brought Paul Bearer out in a cement crypt if Undertaker didn’t do the right thing and lose so Heyman can have control of Undertaker’s side of the realm Paul Bearer was going to be cemented. During the whole fight Undertaker pretended to do the right thing. Then after he won he went to the crypt and said.
“I’m sorry Paul but I have to do it.” He encrypted Paul Bearer in cement.
“Noooooooooooooo!” Yelled Bearer. Heyman and the Dudley’s were shocked. The realms sat back and waited for the answer as to why Undertaker encased his good friend Paul Bearer.

TBC....

Chapter 68
Mystery

“I want you to go against 6 goody goody’s to prove yourself.” Said HHH to Batista.
“Don’t tell me what to do Hunter.” Said Batista.
“You listen here bub what Hunter Hearst Helmsley says goes! Wooooo!” Stated Ric Flair.
“You going to be there?” Asked HHH.
“I’ll be there.” Said Batista.

Meanwhile Undertaker sent for someone.
“I want you to do something.” Said Undertaker.
“Name it, I’m grateful for you getting me into this realm.” Said a very large man named Gene Snitsky.
“I want you to cause Lita’s miscarriage.” Said Undertaker.
“Are you sure about that?” Asked Snitsky.
“Yes.” They shook on it. “One other thing.” Said Undertaker.
“What?”
“You will sign this stating that I had nothing to do with it.”
“Then why do you want it done?”
“I need to teach Kane a lesson.” Said Undertaker.
“Ok.” Said Snitsky.

Vince had Cole Turner summoned.
“I’m stuck in between the living and the dead what the hell do you want?” Asked Cole.
“What I want is for you to create an alternate universe and put those sisters in it once and for all.”
“Glad to but I don’t...” Cole didn’t get a chance to finish.
“Right don’t want Phoebe hurt, I know. Go.” Said Vince. Cole left to do his job.

Batista fought the 6 and then plowed Ric Flair. The next day HHH and Flair went to Batista.
“Why did you hit me?” Asked Flair.
“I felt like it.” Said Batista.
“You wanna hit someone hit me tonight in the square.” Said HHH.
“Gladly.”
“One more thing.” Said HHH.
“What?”
“You will give me one hit, then you’ll lay down like you lost and then we’ll never speak of this again.”
“And you go on to keep controlling me?” Asked Batista.
“Exactly I own you and Orton.”
“Orton turned good.”
“That’s his loss.”

Piper and Leo were sent to the alternate realm. Phoebe and Paige couldn’t be found or so was Cole’s excuse to Vince.
“Where are we?” Asked Piper.
“Nobody’s here.” Said Leo.
“Phoebe! Paige!” Yelled Piper.
“Don’t bother we’re somewhere else.” Said Leo. They continued to look around.

“My baby! My baby!” Yelled Lita. Snitsky was long gone and as promised nobody would know Undertaker was behind it.
“Somebody help!” Kane yelled loud enough that medics came and took Lita to the hospital. Kane was close behind.

Batista didn’t lay down for HHH so it could end his way. He beat the crap out of HHH. Then he said:
“Congratulations Hunter you drove two of us away.” HHH was speechless.

Piper and Leo sat down somewhere in the other realm.
“I’m scared.” Said Piper.
“I know.” Said Leo.
“Where did it go wrong?” Asked Piper.
“I don’t know how we got here.” Said Leo.
“I mean with us.” Said Piper.
“I don’t know.” They kissed and Piper wanted more.

“Ok where the hell is Piper?” Asked Phoebe.
“I checked with the protectors no Leo either.” Said Paige.
“Undertaker.” Said both of them together.

They got to the Undertaker’s and explained that they couldn’t find them. Undertaker then said:
“Stay here I’ll be back.”
“Ok Arnold.” Said Phoebe.
“Grrrrrrrrr.” Growled Undertaker then left.

“Kane how is Lita?” Asked Coach.
“You really care?” Asked Kane.
“Yes.”
“She lost the baby, a son, we were going to have a son. Snitsky will pay!”

“Where are they?” Asked Undertaker as he held Vince up by the throat.
“Who?”
“You know who!”
“In another alternate world.”
“Why?”
“I needed them out of the way.”
“This is a warning Vince.” Undertaker left.

“Lita my Lita.” Said Kane but Lita didn’t answer.

Undertaker got back home.
“Well?” Asked Phoebe.
“Stay here again.”
“What are you going to do?” Asked Paige.
“Ritual.” Said Undertaker. He went upstairs.

Undertaker’s spirit found Piper and Leo. Just as they finished getting dressed. Well actually Piper was putting on her sweater.
“Undertaker.” Said a happy Piper.
“If you’re done, you can go home now.” Said Undertaker.
“How?” Asked an embarrassed Leo.
“Take my hands.” Said Undertaker. Leo and Piper each took one. Undertaker brought them back to his house.

“Yay our sister is back!” Yelled Phoebe.
“And sister’s ah?” Asked Paige.
“Still ex.” Said Piper.
“What about?” Asked Leo.
“Still ex.” Stated Piper. Leo orbed.
“We’re glad to have you back.” Said Phoebe and she and Paige hugged Piper. Then they went home.

A short while later Piper finished a pregnancy test alone in the bathroom.
“Oh no. This can’t be. I’m going to the Undertaker tomorrow to find out if I’m really pregnant.” She said to herself.

Was Piper Pregnant again?

TBC.....

Chapter 69
New Man in Town

Gideon was the new protector in town, he went to Black Witch Eddie Guerreo.
“I want your help.” Said Gideon.
“A Protector wants a black witch’s help? You must be desperate.” Said Eddie.
“I am.” Said Gideon.
“So why do you want my help Homes?”
“I want your help to kill Wyatt Halliwell.” Said Gideon. Eddie listened on.

“I’m pregnant?” Asked Piper getting off Undertaker’s couch.
“Yes.”
“This can’t be.”
“I think it can.”
“But me and Leo have only been together one time since I wanted the divorce.”
“It only takes one time.”
“How do I get out of it?”
“Only one way.”
“No way I’m not going to abort.”
“Then you’ll be a mother again.”
“How the hell do I tell my sisters?”
“Easy tell them to sit down.” Said Undertaker.
“Thank you.” Piper left to break the news to her sisters.

“Ok homes you got me. If he’s the source of all evil in the future he must be stopped.” Said Eddie.
“Else both sides will suffer.” Said Gideon.

Chris entered Wyatt’s bedroom. Wyatt put his shield up around Chris.
“You don’t trust me.” Said Chris. “It’s cause of that mis trust you turn evil.” Phoebe came in.
“Chris what are you doing here?”
“I ah.”
“You’re not who you are, are you?” Asked Phoebe. From downstairs both of them heard:
“Phoebe, Paige come into the kitchen I have to talk to you!” It was Piper.
“Coming!” Chris orbed and Phoebe met her sisters in the kitchen.

“Undertaker you are giving havoc to all of us bad guys.” Said Nunzio.
“What are you going to do about it little man?” Asked Undertaker.
“You’re going to fight us in the square tonight.”
“I accept.”

“Pregnant?” Asked Phoebe.
“Pregnant?” Asked Paige.
“Pregnant.” Said Piper.
“What are you going to do?” Asked Paige.
“I don’t know.” Said Piper.
“You need to tell Leo.” Said Phoebe.
“No.”
“He’ll know sooner or later.”
“He doesn’t want to be part of this family, I don’t want him in this family.” Said Piper leaving the room and going upstairs.

Undertaker fought Nunzio and company. When Undertaker had Nunzio way in the air Nunzio was praying for mercy before Undertaker threw him down.
“Ok Undertaker you win, we’ll never bug you again.” Said Nunzio. Undertaker walked away from the trio.

Demons surrounded Wyatt like crazy. The alarm set off.
“I knew I installed this for a reason.” Said Paige. The sisters went upstairs to take care of business but the demons disappeared.
“What next?” Asked Piper. Good guys came in. One of them was recognizable to the sisters. It was Lita hanging a knife above Wyatt’s head.
“The evil child must die.” Chanted the good guys.
“Oh that’s it!” Yelled Phoebe. They prepared to get ready to blow them away but the good guys disappeared.
“Now what?” Asked Paige.
“Stay here with Wyatt I’ll be back.” Said Piper.

Piper got to the Undertaker’s.
“You know good guys and bad guys just tried to kill my son.”
“At the same time?”
“No one right after another.”
“News to me.”
“One of them you know well.”
“Who?”
“Lita.”
“I’ll take care of her.” Said Undertaker. A pissed off Piper left.

Undertaker sent for Lita. He forced her to look at him.
“Why did you try to kill a baby?”
“He’s evil.”
“You are saying that cause you lost yours.” Lita looked away. Undertaker turned her around so she was facing him. “Well?”
“No, Undertaker you don’t understand. Ask the new protector Gideon he said Wyatt is the source of all evil.” Said Lita.
“I’ll do just that. You try again and you’ll have to deal with me.” Kane came in.
“Leave her alone brother.”
“Kane I think she’s clouding your judgement.” Said Undertaker.
“She’s been through hell, leave her alone.”
“As you wish.” Said Undertaker. Lita left.

Undertaker found Gideon at the magic school. He grabbed him around the neck.
“Why did you send both sides to kill a baby?”
“You figure it out.” Said Gideon.

Meanwhile Kurt had his sights on someone.
“Booker T I want your wife.” Said Kurt Angle.
“You won’t have her.”
“Yeah you won’t have me.” Said Sharmell.
“We’ll see.” Said Angle.

Undertaker sent for Phoebe.
“Did my sister come and see you?”
“Yes.”
“Did you find anything out?”
“The new protector Gideon.”
“Why?”
“I did ritual, Chris is the key go to him.”
“Why can’t you tell me?”
“I’ll tell you this.”
“What?”
“Chris is your nephew.”
“The new baby that Piper’s pregnant with?”
“Yes.”
“I gotta find Chris.”

Phoebe left to find Chris but could the sisters and Chris work together to save Wyatt from certain death?

Chapter 70
Peace

Stone Cold Steve Austin renounced his Wiccan way and became something else. He told Leo to meet him at Orton Park.
“What do you want?” Asked Leo.
“I have a way for you to get back with your wife and end evil once and for all.”
“The world needs evil else they’ll be no good.” Said Leo.
“No the world only needs good boy, can you think of a world like this?” Asked Austin. Leo thought about it, he’s been thinking about it for years.

Booker T found Undertaker.
“Need your help man.” Said Booker.
“What?” Asked Undertaker.
“Tell that pissant Angle to keep away from my wife.”
“Why don’t you?”
“Cause he won’t listen to me.”
“Ahhhhhhhhhhhhhh!” They heard a scream outside Undertaker’s house and then Sharmell came in.
“Baby what’s wrong?” Asked Booker T.
“Angle, he ripped my clothes he tried to, to, to, to.”
“Go home I’ll take care of Angle.” Said Undertaker. Booker T took his very upset wife home.

“You have another chance Orton.” Said HHH.
“A chance for what?”
“Batista became a wiccan, word was that you would be, one last chance to come back to my side.” Said HHH.
“Now why would I do that?” Asked Orton.
“I’m waiting for an answer.” Said HHH.
“No.” Randy Orton walked away. Nobody knew it but he had a different agenda in his head that would be played out soon.

Undertaker found Angle, picked him up and chokeslammed him.
“You do that to a woman again you’re going to be cut into many body parts.” Said Undertaker.
“Do what now?” Asked Angle.
“Stay away from Booker and his wife.” Said Undertaker. Undertaker walked away. Angle decided to do just that.

“You have one more chance Batista.” Said HHH.
“To do what?” Asked Batista.
“To come back.” Batista scratched his chin.
“I thought about it and no.” Batista walked away. HHH was lost he was losing his good friends cause of his stupidity.

“Well?” Asked Austin.
“I want in.” Said Leo.
“Ok boy, you’re an avatar.” What Leo didn’t know was that no evil in the world would change things.

Big Show returned from his stay at a mental hospital.
“How you feel dog?” Asked Teddy Long.
“I feel great, I’m refreshed and I’m an avatar.” Teddy Long had no idea what Big Show meant but he went with it.

Leo returned home.
“What are you doing here?” Asked Piper in the livingroom with her sisters.
“What if I told you that you didn’t have to fight bad guys again?” Asked Leo.
“Impossible there are always bad guys.” Said Paige. Leo had a huge smile on his face.

“You’ll pay for killing my baby.” Said Kane.
“I didn’t do it.” Said Snitsky.
“Yeah you did get him Kane!” Yelled Lita. Kane went after Snitsky yet again.

Meanwhile JBL called for a feed in the square to make an announcement.
“I’m running things in Mr McMahon’s absence on the side of good. I signed the papers this afternoon. Teddy Long came out.
“Wrong dog, I talked to Vince to we are running things. You on the side of bad and me on the side of good.” Said JBL.
“Even better I hate goody, goodies.” Undertaker out of nowhere showed up and tombstoned JBL sending him a message.

“What do you mean?” Asked Phoebe. Austin came in.
“A world of no evil you can be normal again.” Said Austin.
“No.” Said Paige.
“Now wait a minute this is a good idea.” Said Piper.
“I agree.” Said Phoebe.
“No I can’t give it up.” Said Paige.
“Paige you haven’t been doing what we were doing for as long, it’s hard.” Said Piper.
“I say no and I mean no.” Said Paige then she went upstairs.
“You have one week to decide.” Austin left.
“How do you figure in this?” Asked Piper.
“I’m going to be an avatar, with no evil we can all be normal again.” Said Leo.
“You’re just going to spend your time making sure evil stays out of this realm?” Asked Phoebe.
“It will be worth it.” Said Leo. Piper hugged Leo.
“I agree.”
“What does this mean?” Asked Leo.
“I’ll let you know soon.” Said Piper smiling.
“First we gotta convince Paige to go along with it.”

Kane was beating up on Snitsky again and out of nowhere someone showed up to help Kane. Kane was grateful but at the same time confused. He stood scratching his head.

Who is helping Kane? Will Austin, Big Show and the other Avatars win over evil? Tune in tomorrow................

TBC....

Chapter 71
No more evil?

“Have you made a decision?” Asked Austin the Avatar.
“Yes.” Said Piper and Phoebe together.
“No.” Said Paige.
“What is the answer?” Asked Austin.
“Paige agree with them and it all could end, all the evil.” Said Leo.
“Nope.” Said Paige. Piper and Phoebe sighed.
“Kitchen gal now.” Said Austin pointing. They went to the kitchen.
“What?” Asked Paige.
“You’re not changing your mind?”
“Nope.” Austin used his avatar magic on him then they went back into the livingroom.
“Well?” The other three asked.
“I’m ready I think it’s time.” Said Paige. Austin smiled at Leo. Leo didn’t know what to make of it. So evil was now gone.

The next day Kane went to Undertaker.
“Brother?”
“Yeah?” Asked Undertaker.
“I noticed something.”
“What?”
“Evil is gone.”
“What?”
“I went looking for Snitsky and he was gone, then I went looking for Vince, he was gone.”
“Can’t be.”
“Let’s go to Vince’s house you’ll see what I mean.” Said Kane.
“Ok.” Said Undertaker.

“I’m shocked honey that Angle hasn’t been after you.” Said Booker T.
“You know something so am I.” Said Sharmell.

The brothers got to the McMahon house. Linda, Stephanie and Shane was there.
“Hey Undertaker.” Said Stephanie.
“Where is Vince?” Asked Undertaker.
“We don’t know.” Said Linda.
“What do you mean?” Asked Kane.
“I went looking for him to sign some papers and he’s gone.” Said Shane.
“Are you sure?” Asked Undertaker.
“Undertaker it’s a good thing daddy is gone he can’t hurt anyone.” Said Stephanie going upstairs. Undertaker and Kane looked at eachother.

“It’s a good thing baby he’s gone Angle can’t hurt me now.”
“But why is he gone?” Asked Booker to his wife.

“I don’t know but it’s a good thing.” Said Sharmell.

Undertaker and Kane found Orton next.
“Where is HHH?” Asked Undertaker. Batista was with Orton.
“Who knows we wanted to end it once and for all and he’s nowhere to be found.” Said Batista.
“Good riddance.” Said Randy Orton. They moved on. Booker found the brothers.
“Angle is nowhere to be found.” Said Booker.
“Vince either.” Said Undertaker.
“Neither HHH.” Said Kane.
“Sharmell said it’s a good thing.” Said Booker.
“What did she say?” Asked Undertaker.
“That it was a good thing that Angle was gone.”
“Sounds familiar.” Said Kane.
“Stephanie said the same thing.” Said Undertaker.
“Weird.” Said Booker.

Undertaker and Kane made it back home and Sara met them at the door.
“I went to find JBL to tell him to leave you alone.” Said Sara.
“And?” Asked Undertaker.
“He’s nowhere to be found. I ran into Torrie and she said it was a good thing.” Said Sara.
“And what do you think?” Asked Undertaker.
“I think these chicks are too weird.” Said Sara.
“Good thing you have a sane wife brother.” Said Kane. Leo orbed in.
“Be happy it’s a good thing evil is gone.” Undertaker pushed him to the wall.
“What did you say?”
“It’s a good thing.” Repeated Leo. Kane noticed a symbol on Leo’s neck.
“Brother look.”
“Avatar.” Said Undertaker.
“Yes I’m an Avatar.” Said Leo.
“They are evil.” Said Undertaker.
“They got rid of evil it’s a good thing.” Said Leo.
“Take me to whoever made you one.” Said Undertaker.
“Ok.” Said Leo. Leo orbed himself and Undertaker to Austin.

After Undertaker dealt with Austin he went to the sisters and explained what happened.
“No Undertaker it’s a good thing.” Said Piper.
“The world needs good and evil.” Said Undertaker.
“No, not evil.” Said Phoebe.
“Think if there wasn’t any evil where would you be?” Asked Undertaker. Phoebe and Piper shrugged it off but what Austin did with Paige had some weird effect.
“Wait, didn’t we used to?” She asked. Undertaker put his hands on Paige’s shoulders.
“Think girl.”
“This isn’t right what did he do to me?” Asked Paige.
“It’s a good thing.” Said Leo.
“No, no, no we’re brainwashed.” Said Paige.
“Now you see what I mean?” Asked Undertaker.
“What do I do?” Asked Paige.
“Evil and good have to combine.” Said Undertaker.
“Evil is gone.” Said Leo. Undertaker ignored Leo.
“Well?”
“How do we do it?” Asked Paige.
“Summon the king of evil Vincent Kennedy McMahon.”

Evil was summoned and good and evil were on opposites sides again. The avatars didn’t like it but they didn’t matter in the end.

While the realms was alright for the meantime JBL paid a visit to the Undertaker.
“Guys and gals like Shannon Moore and I’m going after him. So stay out of it.” Said JBL.
“Way wrong answer, you, me, tomorrow night fight.” Said Undertaker. JBL ran away with his tail in between his legs.

Will JBL win the fight with the deadman? What else can happen to the charmed ones?

TBC...

Chapter 72
Showdowns

“Are you and Leo are going to get back together since you are pregnant again?” Asked Phoebe.
“No it doesn’t change anything.” Said Piper.
“Does he know?” Asked Paige.
“No.” Said Piper going upstairs to see Wyatt.

The same mysterious person came by to help Kane with Snitsky again. Then the person went to Stamford Square. It was Matt Hardy.
“Kane may be married to Lita, but I love Lita. And I’ll do anything to help her.” Said Matt.

After that announcement Kane went to the Undertaker.
“Grant Lita a divorce.” Said Kane.
“Are you sure?”
“Yes.”
“I’ll go after my battle tonight.” Said Undertaker.
“Thanks brother.”

“Come and get me Undertaker!” Yelled JBL. That’s exactly what happened Undertaker got some of JBL then two people that Undertaker knew very well Gangrel and Viscera came back. They beat the crap out of Undertaker. They all left him bloodied and torn.

Kane went to Matt.
“You can have Lita back.”
“You’re married to her.”
“Undertaker is granting a divorce.”
“Undertaker got beaten by Gangrel and Viscera.” Said Matt.
“Really?” Asked Kane, he then decided to look for his brother.

Piper went up the stairs then fell down them. A minute later her spirit left her body.
“I’m dead?”
“Not yet but if you don’t make up your mind you will be.” Piper turned around to see Cole Turner.

Upstairs Kane brought Undertaker to Leo and the other two sisters.
“Heal my brother.” Said Kane.
“You heal him you wanted evil in the world again.” Said Leo. Kane pushed Leo to the wall.
“Leo!” Screamed Phoebe.
“Heal him now!”
“Ok.” Said Leo. Leo set to work.

“What do you want Cole?”
“To help.”
“You’re dead.”
“I know, I came back to help you.”
“I don’t need help.”
“You need to not give up on love, for you, for Leo, for the baby.”
“What do you want Cole.”
“I need you not to give up, and to help Phoebe not to give up.” Said Cole.
“How? I give up, no point.” Said Piper.
“There is always a point.” Said Cole.

“How do you feel?” Asked Phoebe.
“Thirsty.” Said Undertaker.
“I’ll go get something to drink.” Said Paige. She did that. When she got downstairs she found Piper’s body.
“Ahhhhhhhhhhhh!” The others rushed downstairs.
“Piper!” Yelled Leo. After that someone made Leo disappear.
“Where is Leo?” Asked Phoebe.
“Is Piper dead?” Asked Paige. Undertaker checked.
“She’s alive, which means her soul is near by.” Said Undertaker.
“You bet it is.” Said Piper.
“They can’t hear you.” Said Cole.
“Get me back to my body. And where is Leo?”
“I don’t know.” Said Cole.

Austin brought Leo to where he was.
“Where am I?”
“Do you know who you are?”
“No?”
“Good.” Said Austin. Leo was sent to the desert somewhere.

“You need Leo, Piper.”
“Where is he?” Asked Piper to Cole.
“Like I said I don’t know. But the only way to get him back is to let yourself go.”
“I can’t do that I have the new baby and Wyatt.”
“I know.”
“I can’t do it.”
“You need to trust you, you die and your souls will connect he’ll come back to you.” Piper did what Cole wanted she let her body go.
“Piper!” Yelled Phoebe and Paige together.
“Austin.” Said Undertaker and Kane together. They left the sisters alone with Piper and went to find Austin.

“Good job.” Said JBL.
“When he left the darkness we were out of work.” Said Gangrel.
“He deserves to die.” Said Viscera.
“Not die suffer.” Said Gangrel.
“A lot.” Said JBL.

“Where is he?” Asked Undertaker hanging Austin over the bridge.
“He’s gone with no memory.” Said Austin.
“Ge him now!” Yelled Kane.
“He’s at the Friday Diner on the outskirts.” Said Austin. Undertaker put him on his feet nicely. They went to get Leo back.

“Where ya from hun?” Asked Lise the waitress.
“I don’t know.” Said Leo.
“You can’t remember?” Asked Lise.
“Yeah.” Said Leo. Undertaker and Kane came in and took Leo outside.
“Wonder what they wanted?” Asked Lise.
“What do you want? Who are you?” Asked Leo.
“You’re going back home.” Said Undertaker.
“I don’t know home.” Said Leo.
“You don’t remember?” Asked Kane.
“No, who are you?” Asked Leo.

“Leo, please don’t forget me.” Said Piper.
“What did she say?” Asked Phoebe.
“I think it was Leo don’t forget me.” Said Paige.

“Piper?”
“You remember now?”
“I hear her, where is she?” Asked Leo.
“You tell us.” Said Kane. Leo orbed himself and the brothers back.

“Piper!” Yelled Leo.
“Now what?” Asked Piper to Cole.
“They’ll have to heal you together.” Said Cole.
“How?” Asked Piper.
“Now what?” Asked Phoebe.
“All of us.” Said Undertaker pointing to himself, Kane, Leo and Paige. They healed Piper together.
“Thank you.” Said Piper to Cole.
“Make sure Phoebe doesn’t forget.” Said Cole going back to where he belonged. Piper woke up.
“Piper!” Yelled Phoebe and Paige hugging her.
“I’m back.” Piper mouthed thank you to the Brothers of destruction.

After Undertaker found Lita.
“You get a divorce.”
“I get Matt?”
“Yes.”
“Thank you.”

Matt went to Kane.
“She got the divorce.”
“I know.” Said Kane.
“I’ll make sure Snitsky suffers.” Said Matt.
“I know.” Said Kane.

Undertaker found JBL.
“I took care of Gangrel, Viscera and now Orlando.” Orlando was put on Undertaker’s symbol.
“What does this mean for me?” Asked JBL.
“You go on it means worse for you, if you end it here it ends.”
“I’ll end it here.”
“Good.”

“I can no longer use my power.” Said Leo.
“What do you mean?” Asked Piper.
“I mean the protectors took it away, I’m human.”
“It’s ok Leo we’ll take care of you.” Said Phoebe.

What was next for the Dark Brothers? Could Leo live with being human?

TBC.....


Chapter 73
Is this the End?

*Not sure if anyone has been watching the new season of charmed but damn it’s not as good as it used to be, then again same could be said for wwe.

“I have a new plan.” Said Kurt Angle.
“What do you mean?” Asked Vince.
“The Charmed ones have been working with the Undertaker to take out evil in the world.”
“Don’t forget Kane now.” Said Vince.
“Right.”
“So what’s your point?”
“Distract them.”
“How do you plan to do that?” Asked Vince.
“Wyatt.” Said Angle.
“Oooooooooooh.” Said Vince.
“Oooooooooooh.” Said Angle. He explained more.

Matt was going after Snitsky yet again then he had some interference. Edge beat the crap out of Matt. Lita was shocked.

Meanwhile Viscera done with Undertaker followed Lillian Garcia around. He grabbed her, kissed her and threw her over his shoulder.
“Come here.” He stated.
“Ahhhhhhhhh.” She screamed.

Heyman sent for a feed in the square.
“Undertaker you been running amok and I will stop you.” Said Heyman. Undertaker showed on the screen.
“How do you intend to do that?” He asked.
“Heidenreich.” Said Heyman. Heidenreich cracked a watermelon on his head.
“Grrrrr.” Undertaker was going to enjoy the challenge.

Meanwhile Wyatt was at daycare and Angle showed up, only visible to him.
“I love you teddy bear Wyatt.” Said Angle. Wyatt was having a conversation with an invisible bad guy but what the hell for?

Lillian found Kane.
“Help.”
“What?” Asked Kane.
“Viscera gave me 24 hours.”
“For what?”
“To decide if I want to sleep with him.”
“Did he say he was going to use force if you said no?”
“No.”
“I’ll talk to him.”
“Kane I don’t want to sleep with him.” Said Lillian.
“You might enjoy it, wait here.” Kane left.

Undertaker ordered a contract from Vince to fight Heidenreich in which Heyman was all too happy to get. He then arranged a meeting with the deadman.
“I want to thank you Undertaker for agreeing to this fight.” Said Heyman. Undertaker from the shadows took the contract and signed it, then gave it back. Then he grabbed Heyman.
“Bygones be bygones? I gave you a pass with the Paul Bearer situation, this is Heidenreich’s execution.” He left and Paul Heyman was scared.

Wyatt was talking in his room.
“Ga alhodhohaodhoah.” He said in baby talk.
“Yes Wyatt trust me.” Piper came in.
“Wyatt?”
“Don’t tell.” Said Angle.
“Goayfoygoha.” Wyatt baby talked.
“Who are you talking to big guy?” Asked Piper.
“See ya around Wyatt.” Said Angle. He left. Chris came in.
“What’s going on?”
“Wyatt he’s acting strange.” Said Piper.
“He always does.” Chris turned around and found that Wyatt didn’t put up his shield.
“He didn’t put up his shield.” Said Piper. She went over to her son and he put a shield up around her.
“Wyatt its mommy.” Said Piper. Wyatt didn’t let it down.
“I’ll get him.” Said Chris. Angle came in, shown himself and took Wyatt.
“My baby!” Phoebe, Leo and Paige came in.
“Where’s Wyatt?” Asked Paige.
“Kurt Angle took him.” Said Piper.
“What?” Asked Leo. Piper took Leo and Paige to explain. Phoebe looked at Chris.
“You’re not who you say you are.”
“What do you mean?”
“You’re here for a reason.”
“I can’t tell you.”
“Tell me.”
“I’m the baby in Piper’s tummy.” Phoebe fainted.

Undertaker beat the crap out of Heidenreich.

Kane paid Viscera a visit.
“What is your plan?”
“What?”
“For Lillian.”
“I made her an offer.”
“And if she says no?”
“Nothing will happen to her.”
“I have your word?”
“You have my word Kane.”

“You’re my other baby?” Asked Piper.
“Yes.”
“Then why do you hate me?” Asked Leo.
“You were never around.” Said Chris.
“That’s the future give me a chance to change.”
“After I get Wyatt back.”
“No.” Said Piper.
“Yes he thinks evil is good now.”
“So?” Asked Phoebe.
“He doesn’t put his shield up around me.” Said Chris.
“After this we never want to see you again.” Said Piper.
“Piper.” Said Leo.
“No never.” Said Piper going upstairs.


“That was heaven.” Said Lillian.
“I thought you would like it.”
“I guess bigger is better.” Said Lillian.
“You got that right baby.” Said Viscera.

Matt ordered Edge to the square. Lita was by Matt’s side.
“Why did you go after me?”
“You wanna know why?” Asked Edge.
“Yes.”
“Lita tell him.” Said Edge.
“I’m in love with Edge.” Said Lita. They kissed right in front of Matt.
“Noooooooooooooo!” Yelled Matt.

TBC.....

Chapter 74
No it’s not the end, this is

Chris got Wyatt back and the wiccans took care of Vince and Angle so they couldn’t do it again.
“I want you out of my house.” Said Piper.
“I know.” Said Chris.
“Maybe we should give him a chance.” Said Phoebe.
“No.” Said Leo.
“I won’t be back but please make sure Wyatt stays on the side of good.”

“What are you going to do Vince?” Asked Matt.
“What do you mean?”
“He stole my girl.”
“Fight and if you lose you are banished.” Matt left not happy.

“Oh baby Kane is small, Matt is small, your cock is big.” Said Lita.
“You said it baby.” Said Edge, they kissed again.

Hassan and Davari made an announcement.
“We want the Undertaker.” Said Hassan.

“Again?” Asked Sara.
“This is getting old.” Said Undertaker.
“So what are you going to do?” Asked Sara.
“They want a fight, they get it.”

“I’m going to expose them.” Said Angle.
“Let it go Kurt.” Said Vince.
“No the whole world has no clue they are witches they will be exposed.”
“You do that we’ll have every loony in this realm.” Said Vince.
“I don’t care.”
“You do it without me.” Said Vince.
“Fine.” Said Angle.

Undertaker beat the crap out of Hassan and Davari and their evil friends. They rest in peace and Hassan was forced to leave.

Randy Orton called for a feed.
“Undertaker I challenge you.” Two lightning bolts, and smoke and Undertaker’s image.
“I accept. Rest in peace.”

“What the hell is going on here?” Asked Piper.
“We been exposed.” Said Paige.
“And now we got every idiot on our door.” Said Phoebe.
“Paige orb us to the Undertaker.” Said Piper.

“He’s not here.” Said Sara.
“Where is he?” Asked Phoebe.
“I don’t know.” Said Sara.
“Kane.” Said Piper. Paige orbed them to Kane.

Matt lost the fight to Edge and he was forced to leave, he went to search for his brother.
“I want to fuck baby.” Said Lita.
“You said it girl.”
“Right here baby.” Said Lita.
“In the square?” Asked Edge.
“Yes.” So they got undressed and did the wild thing.

“We been exposed.” Said Piper.
“To who?” Asked Kane.
“Other realms.” Said Phoebe.
“That’s dangerous.” Said Kane.
“Any suggestions?” Asked Paige.
“Just one.” Said Kane.

“If you two are done fucking.” Said Undertaker. Lita and Edge stopped.
“What the hell do you want deadman?” Asked Edge.
“Not you, guess your ho wants different.” Said Undertaker.
“Fuck off Undertaker.” Said Lita.
“No you.” With a wave of his hand Lita and Edge disappeared. Randy Orton came in and the fight was on.

Kane did ritual. At Halliwell Haven the girls awaited.
“Ok lets go.” Said Piper.
“Are we doing the right thing?” Asked Paige.
“Yes.” Said Phoebe.

They orbed to the slave area.
“What’s this?” Asked Victor.
“Go to Kane’s, with Wyatt, you’ll be safe and well taken care of there.” Said Piper.
“What do you mean?” Asked Victor.
“Dad please you need to.” Said Phoebe.

Kane was still in ritual. Halliwell Haven was caught on fire. The next day word got around that the sisters were dead.

“I burned the Undertaker.” Said Randy Orton.
“My son killed the Undertaker.” Said Cowboy Bob.
“I am not dead, I’ll be back.” Said Undertaker.

After the fire was put out the whole realm gathered outside the house. Leo showed up.
“Piper?”
“Step back.” Said the cop.
“No this is my house.”
“Not anymore.” Said another cop. Leo sadly walked away.
“Great big fire huh?” Asked a girl.
“Who are you?” Asked Leo.
“I’m Mandy.” Said the girl.
“Did you know them?” Asked the second one.
“Do I know you?” Asked Leo.
“I’m Bonnie.” Said the second one.
“It’s a tragedy.” Said the third.
“Who are you?”
“I’m Trina.” Said the third.
“Do I know you?” Asked Leo.
“Yes you do.” They glamored to their old selves.
“But how?” Asked Leo.
“Kane, it’s the only way we can lead normal lives.” Said Piper.
“Fighting no evil.” Said Phoebe.
“And this time I agree with it.” Said Paige.
“What about me?” Asked Leo. They changed him.
“Let’s go.” From the house Darryl was watching he knew who they were.

Darryl found the brothers.
“Which one helped the sisters?” Asked Darryl
“Me, why?” Asked Kane.
“Thank you.” Said Darryl.
“Now they can truly rest in peace.” Said Undertaker.
“You really need a new line.” Said Kane.
“I think it’s time for me to take a vacation.” Said Darryl.

Undertaker defeated Randy Orton, good went on fighting evil and the sister’s became cousins Glamour Mandy, Bonnie and Trina. All was right with the world.

The End